Digital PDFs

AA-D647A-TA

December 1978

260 pages

Original

7.8MB

Document:	aa-d647a-ta
Order Number:	AA-D647A-TA
Revision:
Pages:	260
Original Filename:	https://svn.so-much-stuff.com/svn/trunk/pdp8/src/dec/qf310/aa-d647a-ta.pdf

OCR Text

‘

decitusystem
.

system

reFerence
manual

Eflaflflfifl

COS 310
-

System Reference Manual
Order

No.

AA-D647A—TA

October

1978

This
the

is a reference manual for
user
COS-310
who
system
wants
to
use
the
DIBOL
in developing appli—
language
cation programs.

SUPERSESSION/UPDATE

INFORMATION:

This

new

OPERATING SYSTEM AND VERSION:

COS-310

8.00

SOFTWARE

COS—310

8.00

the

VERSION:

manual.

contact
additional copies of this
document,
Distribution
Software
Center, Digital Equipment

order

Corporation, Maynard,

Massachusetts

01754.

digital equipment corporation magnard. mossochusetts
-

First

The
and

October

1978

information in this document is subject to change without notice
should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment

Digital Equipment Corporation

Corporation.
for

Printing,

any errors

that may

appear

in this

assumes

responsibility

document.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such

license.

responsibility
equipment that is

assumed

not

following

are

the

supplied by

1978

use

DIGITAL

or
or

reliability of
its

affiliated

trademarks

COMMENTS

critical

companies.

form on the last page of this
evaluation to assist us in pre-

Digital Equipment Corporation:

DIGITAL

DECsystem-lo

MASSBUS

DEC

DECtape

OMNIBUS

PDP

DIBOL

OS/8

DECUS

EDUSYSTEM

PHA

UNIBUS
COMPUTER LABS
COMTEX

FLIP CHIP
FOCAL

RSTS

INDAC

TYPESET-B

DDT

LAB-8

DECCOMM

DECSYSTEM-ZO
RTS-8

TYPESET—ll
TMS-ll
ITPS—lO

ASSIST-ll

software

by Digital Equipment Corporation

The postage-prepaid READER'S
document requests the user's
paring future documentation.

The

for

u/79-1u

RSX

CONTENTS

Page

PREFACE

INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER

1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.4.1
1.2.4.2
1.2.4.3
1.2.4.4
1.2.4.5
1.2.4.6
1.2.4.7
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.2.8
1.2.9
1.2.9.1
1.2.9.2
1.2.10
1.2.11
1.2.12
1.2.13
1.2.14
1.2.15
1.2.16
1.2.17
1.2.18
1.2.19
1.2.20
1.2.21

xii
DIBOL

LANGUAGE

1-1

SOURCE

PROGRAM

1-1
1-3
1—4
1-6
1—7
1-9
1-11
1-11
1-13
1—14
1-14
1-15
1—16

STATEMENTS
ACCEPT
CALL
CHAIN

Input/Output Statement
Control Statement
Control Statement
—

Data

Manipulation

Data

Conversion

Statements

Arithmetic Expressions

Clearing Fields and Records
Moving Alphanumeric Data
Moving Numeric Data
Moving Records
Data Formatting
DISPLAY
Input/Output Statement
END
Compiler Statement
FINI
Input/Output Statement
FORMS
Input/Output Statement

1-18
1—20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-23
1—23

—

GO TO

Control Statement
GO TO
Computed GO To
IF
Control Statement
INCR
—

Unconditional

1—24

—

INIT

Input/Output

ERROR

PROC
READ

RECORD

—

RETURN

STOP

—

Statement
Statement

Definition Statement

Control

Control
TRACE
Control

TRACE/NO
TRAP

Data

Compiler

—

Control

Compiler Statement
Input/Output Statement

START

—

Statement
Statement

Statement
-

Debugging

Statement

iii

Statement

1—24
1—26
1—28
1—29
1-30
1-31
1-33
1—34
1-35
1-36
1-37

(Cont.)

CONTENTS

Page
1.2.22
1.2.23
CHAPTER

CHAPTER

XMIT

THE

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3

MASTER

2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7

CHAPTER

WRITE

—

2-1

CONTROL

MOUNT

Procedures
COMMANDS

DATE

DELETE

2-7

DIRECTORY
PLEASE

2-8
2—10

RUN

2—11
2-13
2-14
2—15
2—16
2-17
2—18
2-20
2-21
2-22

SAVE

EDITOR COMMANDS
ERASE
FETCH
LIST

Line Number
Number Commands

RESEQUENCE
WRITE

3.1
3.2

SYSGEN/B OPERATING
SYSGEN/C OPERATING

3.3

SYSGEN

DATA

4.1

DFU OPERATING

4.2.1
4.2.2
4.3
4.4

2—4
2-5
2-6

BATCH

SYSTEM GENERATION

4.2

2-3
2-4

Operating
MONITOR

4.1.6
4.1.7

2—1

PROGRAM

Messages

MONITOR

4.1.4
4.1.5

1—40

MONITOR

2.4
2.5

4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

1-39

Input/Output Statement
Input/Output Statement

ERROR

RUN-TIME

2-23
2-24

MESSAGES

ERROR MESSAGES

ERROR

FILE

PROGRAM

3-1

(SYSGEN)

3—1
3-3
3-5

PROCEDURES
PROCEDURES

MESSAGES

UTILITY

PROGRAM

4-1

(DFU)

PROCEDURES

4-1

DFU,filnam Operating Procedures
DFU/B Operating Procedures

4—2
4-2
4—3
4—3
4—4
4—5
4-6

DFU/K Operating Procedures
DFU/D Operating Procedures
DFU/DL Operating Procedures
DFU/E Operating Procedures
DFU/EL Operating Procedures
LOGICAL

UNIT

COS-310

SYSTEM

ASSIGNMENTS

THE

4-7
4-7

Unit Size

Determining Logical
How Logical Units are Assigned by
DISK
DFU

USERS
ERROR

MESSAGES

DFU

4—8
4-9
4-10

CONTENTS

DIBOL

COMPILER

COMP

OPERATING

(Cont.)

(COMP)
PROCEDURES

Program Compilation Listing
Storage Map Listing
CONDITIONAL COMPILATION PROCEDURE (CCP)
Source

SIZE

THE

COMPILER

DIBOL DEBUGGING TECHNIQUE

CHAPTER

OPERATING

COMMANDS

DDT

ERROR

a>m<ncna>m hdwrahukaH U'lnwaH
oooooo NEHFJPJFJH 0-0340me
O

REFERENCE

CREF

OPERATING
ERROR

OPERATING

PIP

ERROR

SORT

\DkOkaOKDKOKOKDkO bmwWNNl—J

Nl—l

WNH

(PIP)

PROCEDURES

(OPT-

MESSAGES

(SORT)

OPERATING

Record

PROCEDURES

FILE

Descriptor Division

INPUT/OUTPUT Division
MERGE

PROGRAM

Perform a Read/Check (OPT- R)
Transfer Source Files (OPT- S)
Transfer System Program (OPT- V)
Return to Monitor
(OPT— X)

SORT COMMAND

PROCEDURES

INTERCHANGE

SORT PROGRAM
o

(CREF)

MESSAGES

(OPT- E)
Copy and Verify

PROGRAM

Transfer Binary File (OPT— B)
Copy Device (OPT— C)
Transfer Data Files (OPT— D)
Consolidate Space in Directory (OPT- E)
Allocate Space to Binary Scratch Area

PROCEDURES

CREF

PIP

(DDT)

MESSAGES

PERIPHERAL

CHAPTER

DDT
DDT

CROSS

CHAPTER

PROGRAM

BINARY

ERROR MESSAGES

OPERATING

PROCEDURE

Merge Using SORT and the /A Option
Merge Using SORT and the /M Option
Merge Using SORT and the /n Option
SORT

ERROR

MESSAGES

ooooo LJ'IDWH
II

ooooooo \OkomWNflO‘
‘0

\DkDSDkOKDkowKDKOlllll\JanU1brom)N+a

CHAPTER

FILE

10.1
10.2
10.3
10.3.1

UNIVERSAL

CONTENTS

(Cont.)

PROGRAM

(FILEX)

EXCHANGE

FILEX

DISKETTE

OPERATING

PROCEDURES

COPY

(OPT:C)
os/8 ASCII Input

(Mode A)

COS-310 Data Input (Mode D)
Universal Input (Mode U)
Output Modes (A, D, S, U)

COS/8

ASCII Output (Mode
Data File Output

A)
(Mode D)
Source File Output (Mode S)
Universal Diskette Output (Mode U)
DELETE (OPTzD)
LIST (OPTzL)
EXIT (OPT:X)
COS-310
COS-310

CHAPTER

ZERO

(OPT:Z)

FILEX

ERROR

PATCH

PROGRAM

10-13

MESSAGES

11-1

(PATCH)

PATCH

ERROR

MESSAGES

11-1
11-3
11-4
11-4
11-4
11-5

BOOT

PROGRAM

(BOOT)

12-1

BOOT
BOOT

OPERATING PROCEDURES
ERROR MESSAGES

12-1
12-1

LINE

CHANGE

(LINCHG)

13-1
13-1
13-2

PATCH OPERATING PROCEDURES
ERROR CORRECTION

CTRL/U

(Restart)

Wrong 01d Value
Bad

CHAPTER

Checksum

PROGRAM

LINCHG

OPERATING PROCEDURES

LINCHG

ERROR MESSAGES

FORMAT

PROGRAMS

RK05
FORMATTING RX02
FORMATTING

CHAPTER

10-11
10-11

(DKFMT,
DISKS

DISKETTES

DUMP AND FIX TECHNIQUE
DAFT

COMPILING

DYFMT)

(DAFT)

PROCEDURE

OPERATING PROCEDURES
DAFT COMMAND FILE
DAFT COMMANDS
DAFT

14-1
14-1
14-2

15-1
15-1
15-1
15-2
15-2

CONTENTS

(Cont.)

Page
15.4.1
15.4.2
15.5
15.6

Used

DAFT

Commands

OUTPUT

15—3
15-5

DAFT

ERROR MESSAGES

15—7

Summary

PROGRAM GENERATOR

(PRINT)

PROCEDURE
PROCEDURES
Creation of Source

FLOWCHART GENERATOR PROGRAM

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.3.1
17.3.2
17.3.3
17.3.4
17.3.5
17.3.6
17.3.7
17.3.8
17.3.9
17.3.10
17.3.11
17.3.12
17.4
17.5

FLOW

COMPILING

FLOW

OPERATING

PRINT
PRINT

FILEX

File

Compilation
Program Execution
COMMAND

FILE

Section
HEADl and HEAD2
INPUT Section

16-3

IDENT

Section

Section
Section
END Section
COMPUTE

16-6
16-8
16-8

ERROR

MESSAGES

PROCEDURE
PROCEDURES

COMMANDS
PROC Command

Command
Command
GOTO Command
CGOTO Command
I/O Command
TITLE Command
SBTTL Command
PAGE Command
START
STOP

FLOW

EXAMPLE

FLOW

ERROR MESSAGES

(MENU)

OPERATING

PROCEDURES
COMMAND FILE

Display Section
Command

Section

Accept Section
MENU

17-1
17-1
17-1

17-3
17-3

Command
IF Command
CALL Command
DISK

(FLOW)

17-2

FLOW

MENU PROGRAM

18.1
18.2
18.2.1
18.2.2
18.2.3
18.3

16~1
16-1

COMPILING
OPERATING

16.1
16.2
16.2.1
16.2.2
16.2.3
16.3
16.3.1
16.3.2
16.3.3
16.3.4
16.3.5
16.3.6
16.4

CHAPTER

15-2

DAFT

Command

REPORT

CHAPTER

Symbols
DAFT

ERROR MESSAGES

vii

CONTENTS

(Cont.)

Page
A-l

APPENDIX A

COS-310

APPENDIX B

COS-310 FILES

B-l

COS-310 SOURCE FILES
COS-310 DATA FILES
COS-310 BINARY FILES
COS-310 SYSTEM FILES

B-l

B.l
B.2
B.3
B.4
B.5
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX

SYSTEM

CHARACTER SET

DEVICE

ERROR MESSAGE

INDEX

C-l

PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

ADVANCED

D.l
D.l.l
D.l.2
D.l.3
D.l.4
D.l.4.l
D.l.4.2
D.l.4.3
D.l.4.4
D.2
D.2.l
D.2.2
D.2.3

ACCEPT AND

D.2.4
D.2.5
D.2.6
D.2.7
D.2.8
D.2.9
D.3
D.3.l
D.3.1.l
D.3.l.2
D.3.l.3

FORMAT

B-l
B-2
B—2
B-2

DISPLAY

Background Information
Interaction

and

DISPLAY

Example Using ACCEPT and DISPLAY
Generalized ACCEPT Subroutines
Hardware Display Clear Feature
Clear Incorrect Data by Displaying Spaces
Other Desired Features
Escape Code Sequences as Terminators
DIRECT ACCESS

TECHNIQUES

Background Information
The

for Direct Access
the Direct Access Technique
Works in DIBOL
Unsorted File
Sorted File
Rough Table, No Index File
Rough Table Plus Index File
Reason

D-l
D-l
D-l
D-l
D-2
D—2
D-2
D-4
D-6
D-8
D-8
D-8
D-9

How

D-9
D-10
D—ll

Summary

D-12
D—l3
D-l4

Record

D-l4

Count
ACCESS NOTES

DIRECT
XMIT

D-15

Statements

(Extending
Truncating a File
Appending to a File

Rewriting

D.4

NUMERIC

D.5

CHAIN

FIELD

File
VERIFICATION

STATEMENT

D-l7

NOTES

INIT

Interaction of CHAIN and

D.5.2
D.5.3
D.6
D.6.l
D.6.2
D.6.3

Transferring Variable Values
Multiple CHAIN Entry Points
DIBOL

SYS)

PROGRAMMING

OPERATING

SOURCE

PROCEDURES

Division
Procedure Division

Data

viii

D—15

D—l5
D—15
D—l6
D-16

D.5.l

(channel,

File)

FILES

D—l7
D—l7

D-18
D-l9
D-l9
D-19
D-20

CONTENTS

(Cont .)

Page
D.7
D.8

CHECKDIGIT

VT50/VT52

D-21
D-22

FORMULA
ESCAPE

SEQUENCES

Glossary-l

GLOSSARY

Index-1

INDEX

FIGURES

1-1

Sample

10-1
10-2
B-l

Universal Diskette
Flowchart of FILEX OPT:C
Monitor

Source

Program

Organization

1-1
10—3

10'10
B-3

TABLES

l
l
1

1
2

3
2—1
5 l
A 1
A 2

Source

Program Limitations

Terminating Characters
Special Characters
Monitor Keyboard Commands
DIBOL Statement Words of Code Requirements
Characters Representing Negative Numbers
COS—310 Character Set

2—2
5 7
A

PREFACE

This

the
in
document for
those
interested
applying
Readers of this manuCOS—310 system environment.
the
possess a basic knowledge of programming and of
Additional
background may be obtained, however, by
the COS-310 New User's Guide (AA—D758A-TA).

reference

DIBOL language in
al are assumed to
DIBOL
language.

consulting

not
intended
is constructed in a usable order, yet it is
Each chapter and major section is conread sequentially.
as
sections
be as informationally independent from other
This method was followed to allow reference to specific in—
possible.
formation without the need for frequent cross—referencing.

This manual
it be
that
structed to

In addition to the information in the
material
and
summaries are provided

the

Glossary.

reference
additional
chapters,
in Appendices A through D and in

INTRODUCTION

THE

DIBOL LANGUAGE

DIGITAL's Business Oriented Language (DIBOL) is a COBOL-like
language
used
to write business application programs.
The DIBOL language consists of data definition and procedure statements.

OVERVIEW OF THE

COS-310 SYSTEM

The COS-310 system is designed for the small system
disk—based
data processing system that is adaptable
of business—related processing tasks.
The

COS—310

terminals,
has

been

system is

enhanced with

use

and

other

included

act

part of COS-310

diskettes,

user.

wide

video

variety
display

hardware.
Specially developed software
tools for both application programmers and

DIGITAL
as

system operators.
Programs provided
the

include

but

are

not

limited

following:
o

MONITOR/EDITOR controls the

SYSGEN

DFU

and
of
all
calling
operating
other
programs in the COS—310 system;
provides the I/O control for the peripheral devices;
and contains editing
capabilities
for
This program is recorrecting user programs.
ferred to throughout the manual as the Monitor.

builds

and

changes the system hardware configuration.

assigns logical units

unit

table.

COMP

translates

ry program

which

DIBOL
can

and

language
be

run

xiii

displays

source

the

prints

statements

Datasystem 308

logical

into

a bina310.

between

de-

two

PIP

transfers
vices.

data,

SORT sequences
Records may be

records according to key characters or fields.
sorted into ascending (0—9 or A—Z) or descend-

ing

THE

files

binary

(Z-A

9—0)

source,

sequence.

COS-310 FILE STRUCTURE

and
source,
data,
types of files are used in COS-310:
binary,
be
can
Source
and
files
files,
files, compiled binary
system.
system

Four

saved in COS—310
directories.
0

Data

be
0

directories.

files

Source

files

Binary

files

programs
0

are

processed by

Data

files

contain

control

programs

The following
manual.

Symbols

DIBOL

saved

COS-310

data

etc.)

supplied

programs.

the compiler and contain
are the output of
translated into COS-310 interpretive code.

SORT,

MANUAL NOTATION

completely devoted to the storage
DIBOL or system programs.

System files include programs
COMP,

cannot

DIBOL

(MONITOR,
SYSGEN,
PIP,
DFU,
part of the COS—310 package.

CONVENTIONS

symbols, characters,

and

terms

are

used

this

throughout

Example

Explanation
$
1‘

Lowercase

PROC

characters

Uppercase

be
NO

TRACE

characters
RU

...

CHAINO+...CHAIN7

determined

User

information

Words
entered

red

~RU

SYSGEN/C

exactly

Optional continuation

Your

input

i
r

characters
as shown.

i
2

supplied.

ments.

Characters

the

system.

argu-

Symbols

Example

RUaJPIP

PROC

/T
/N
/L

START

[

Explanation
or

space

Braces

make

blank.

indicate
choice
enclosed.
a

items

that
of

Brackets indicate that
whether or not
decide
optional feature.

[n][/x]

Information

RETURN

board

must

TURN.

The

that

(input)

input via

must

you
of

one

must

you
to

use

the

key—

followed by a RERETURN code indicates
of
information
line
be

complete.

symbol

will be used in
assumed
It will be
text.
its use is understood.
for

the

RETURN

this
that

COS-310 CHARACTERS

COS-310

characters

include

letters A-Z;

numbers

0-9;

and

characters:
:—

V-U'Juo +F—A A=¢\
.

*(E

'U‘—‘

%
|__1

the

special

-/v
_.

TERMS

Alphanumeric
Refers

the

alphanumeric

entire COS—310 character set.
Initialized
fields must be enclosed by single quotes.

values

base

ten

Decimal, Octal
Refer

(decimal)

the numeric values associated
and base eight (octal).

specifically with

dev
Refers

a
three—character designation for the device
located.
The
first two characters indicate
the third character indicates
drive
the
the
on.
The types of devices are listed below.

data

device;
mounted

indicates
indicates

indicates

RXOl
RX02
RK05

which
upon
the type of
device

diskettes.
diskettes.
disks.

Expressions
Refer to variables, constants, or arithmetic expressions made up
variables, constants, and the operators #, +, -, *, /.

Filnam,pronam,1abe1,cmndfl
Identify names assigned
lines.
These
characters are
Label

can

begin

with

/I +1
It

These

may

and
input
programs, statements,
first six
the
but
any length
only

significant.

alphabetic
cmndfl

—Il—.ll

-I

files,

only contain alphabetic and numeric characters,

and

Pronam

names

contain

can

and

but

must

character.
any

COS~310

character

except

advisable not to use -, /, @,L4, tab, and , in a data filnam.
characters may complicate or inhibit some program execution.

Logical Units
Refer

data

logical unit

file
table

storage
which

via
These units are accessed
referenced by logical unit numbers.

areas.

Numeric
Refers

the

characters

0—9

and combinations thereof.

xvi

CHAPTER 1
DIBOL LANGUAGE

as
chapter provides reference information on the DIBOL
language
in
the
COS-310 system.
If other basic information is desired,

This
used

refer

1.1

the

SOURCE

COS-310

New

User's Guide.

PROGRAM

consists
of
statements
ar—
program (see Figure 1—1)
in
two
Data and Procedure.
Comments following a
divisions,
the
document
and
of
statement.
semicolon
contents
each
purpose
lines
that
Statement
begin with a semicolon contain only comments.
of
and
ease
Tab settings are used in the program to improve clarity
A

DIBOL

source

ranged

reading.
The

Data

the

Division contains
information to be

labels which identify
Initial
referenced.
this division.

size
and
which define the type
in the program, and optionally contain
where
information
can
be
the memory location
for these statements can be included in
values
statements

used

The Procedure Division consists of statements
control
which
program
An alphanumeric label can be assigned to a statement with—
execution.
in the Procedure Division.
A label must begin with a letter
and
can
have
a maximum of
six significant characters.
Labels precede and are

separated from the
in

other

statement

comma.

These

labels

are

referenced

statements.

statement within a DIBOL program begins on a numbered line.
Line
numbers
are
or
manually
assigned
automatically when the program is
error
DIBOL does not use these numbers,
but
messages,
being typed.
Each

editing functions,

and

debugging aids

refer

them.

0100
0110
0120

RECORD

0130
0140
0150

0160
0170
0180

INBUF
STOCKN, D4
DESC, A25

;Record named INBUF.
;Numeric field named STOCKN.

UCOST, D5
QORDER, D4

;Five—character numeric field.
;Four-character numeric field.
;Unreferenceable unnamed field.
;Record named OUTBUF.
;Unnamed numeric field.

RECORD

0190
0200
0210
0220
0230 RECORD
0240
0250
0260 PROC
0270
0280
0290 LOOP,
0300
0310

0320
0330
0340
0350
0360
0370 EOF,
0380
0390
0400 END

OUTBUF
D4
,
,
,
,

field

;Alphanumeric

named

DESC.

field.

A25

;Twenty—five

D5
D4

;Unnamed field.
;Temporary storage field.
;Numeric field named ECOST.
;Unnamed record-temporary storage

ECOST,

TITLE,

A6,

'OVRHED'

INIT(1,I,TITLE)
INIT(2,0,'OUTPUT')
XMIT(1,INBUF,EOF)

character

;cannot be directly referenced.
initialized to 'OVRHED'.
;Beginning of Procedure Division.
;Input 'OVRHED' yon channel 1.

;Field

;‘OUTPUT'

channel

2—output.

;Transfers INBUF to EOF.
OUTBUF=INBUF
;INBUF moved to OUTBUF.
;Conditional statement.
IF(STOCKN.LT.1000) GO TO LOOP
;UCOST times QORDER moved to
ECOST=UCOST*QORDER
;ECOST.
;Transfer OUTBUF onto channel 2.
XMIT(2,0UTBUF)
;Blank line.
GO

LOOP

;Branch control to LOOP.
;Identifies end of logical unit.
;Writes record and closes file.
;Stops program execution.

(2)
(l)

FINI
FINI

STOP

Figure 1-1

1-2

statement.

;Optional compiler

START

DIBOL LANGUAGE

Sample

end

;Marks

the

Source

Program

the

program.

Table 1-1

Program Limitations

Source

Maximum characters
Maximum number of
files per program

about

8,000 per file

source

Maximum number of symbols
16K byte system/24K byte

system
Line

numbers

Maximum
per

1.2

There

365/511

larger
available

0-4095

characters

line

120

STATEMENTS

are

six

kinds

statements

DIBOL:

Compiler statements (START, PROC, and END)
and end of the program.
division,
ning,
are non—executable.
PROC
marks the end of the
the Procedure Division.

ments

size

definition statements
of data to be stored.

Data

manipulation

data

within memory.

Data

Control

STOP,

Input/Output

(CALL,

effect

END

are

the

describe
include field

the
three

begin—
state—

and
optional
beginning of

and

(RECORD)

the

Must

information.

and

INCR

type

the movement

control

GO TO, IF, ON ERROR, RETURN,
of program statement execution.

CHAIN,

order

the

and

Division and

Data

statements

TRAP)

START

label
These

statements

and
(ACCEPT, DISPLAY,
READ,
WRITE,
data movement within memory or between memory
and peripheral devices.
INIT and FINI associate and disasso—
ciate
channel numbers used by the program.
The FORMS statement controls line spacing and paging on the printer.

XMIT)

control

Debugging

statements

statement

following

(TRACE,
of

These statements are discussed
kind or by order of use.

program

TRACE)

permit

statement-by—

execution.

alphabetical

order

rather

than

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-3

ACCEPT
1.2.1

Input/Output

Statement

The ACCEPT

stores
statement takes input from the keyboard;
it
in
a
specified alphanumeric field, and stores the decimal value of the ter—
Table
minating character (the last key typed) in a decimal field (see
1-2
The
Terminating Characters).
terminating value can be used in

later

statements

primarily

the

DIBOL

used

with

(dfield,

afield)

program.

the

DISPLAY

statement

and

has

the

form:

where:
dfield

afield

the

name

the

terminating character

the

name

input is
When
from
full

the

numeric

alphanumeric field

stored.

where

the

value

keyboard

waits
for
is encountered, the system
input
Program execution continues either after afield is

is typed.
When ACCEPT is
the
character
full,
positions
remaining
It is desirable to clear the
afield
unchanged.
statement is executed.

before
remain

statement

keyboard.
after

nated
afield
an

field where the decimal
is to be stored.

is
of

terminating

afield

character

termi—
in the
before

Example:
ACCEPT

(A,B)

in
B
and
;Stores input from the keyboard
the
charof
the
value
;stores
terminating
;acter in A.

(A(3),B(4,5))

;Stores input from the keyboard in the
of B, and stores
5th
characters
;and

;terminating value in
;array A.

1-4

EIBOL LANGUAGE

the

3rd

element

4th
the
of

Table

Terminating

1-2
Characters

Decimal
Value

00
01
02
04

05
06
07
08
09
10

Last

Null

BACKSPACE
TAB
LINE FEED

CTRL/K
CTRL/L

CTRL/N
CTRL/P
CTRL/R

26
27
63

end-of-field

CTRL/A
CTRL/B
CTRL/D
CTRL/E
CTRL/F
CTRL/G

ll
12
l3
l6
18
20
21
22
23
24
25

Key Typed

RETURN

CTRL/H

ENTER

CTRL/T
CTRL/U
CTRL/V
CTRL/W
CTRL/X
CTRL/Y
CTRL/Z
ESC
DELETE

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

1-5

CALL
1.2.2

CALL

The

CALL

has

Control

branches

statement
the form:

CALL

Statement

program

control

internal

subroutine.

label

where:
label

the'label of the first
Procedure Division of

the

statement

the

subroutine

program.

so
stack
The CALL statement saves the return location in a
pushdown
that
program control will return to that location when the subroutine
has been executed.
Additional subroutine CALL statements may be nested within a subroutine to a depth of 50.

Example:

CALL
.<—

SET

——————————————

STOP

SET,

PROFIT=PRICE-COST

CALL

CTAX

-->A=...

STOP

CTAX,

TAX=PROFIT/2
IF

(TAX.GT.MAX)CALL

ERROR

--RETURN

This example shows how execution control branches to and returns
from
one
subroutine
to the next.
The solid lines show the result of CALL
statements while the broken lines show the
of
result
RETURN
statements.

1-6

DIBOL LANGUAGE

CHAIN
1.2.3

CHAIN

The CHAIN
available
programs

compiled
form

Statement

which has exceeded the
allows
a
DIBOL program
memory to be separated into two or more smaller DIBOL
Each program is written and
which are executed sequentially.
CHAIN programs are executed beginning with the
separately.
statement

user

immediately following

statement

The

Control

the

CHAIN

statement

the

PROC

statement.

is:

where:
is

numeric variable

number

command.

DIBOL
A

the
sequence
representing
as
specified in the RUN

(0-7)

binary programs

maximum of

seven

programs

can

chained

together.
execution
When the CHAIN statement is encountered in a DIBOL program,
the current program is stopped, and the indicated CHAIN program is
of
loaded.
All CHAIN programs must be'properly declared in
a
RUN
com—
The program loaded by CHAIN will not return to the place where
mand.
A return to
a
the initial program was stopped.
a
program
requires
CHAIN statement to that program.

Example:
.RUN

START+HELP+TRY+ACCT
HELP

START
Data

Div.

Data

Div.

Data

PROC

—>-

STOP

PROC

CHAIN

2——-—r——>.

l————

CHAIN

this example
is
START
chain 2, and ACCT is chain
In

program sequentially,
program could chain

Div.

y——>c

PROC

Div.

PROC

ACCT

TRY

chain
3.

3———J

HELP

the programs could
back into itself.

TRY

executes

the

chain

Although this example
chained

DIBOL

any order.

LANGUAGE

1-7

All

file

information

status

Therefore,

all

statement

before

output

and

executing

between
chained
destroyed
programs.
be
files
should
closed with a FINI
update

CHAIN

prevent the loss of

information.

features are turned off when a CHAIN statement
be
turned on again in the CHAIN program by
They may
If DDT
is
used
being
using an appropriate TRACE or TRAP statement.
when a CHAIN statement is executed, control returns to DDT.
Both the TRACE
is
executed.

and

TRAP

is
automatiprogram loaded by the RUN command
a
loaded
if
the
record
is
in
However,
by the
cally
program
in
CHAIN statement, the record retains whatever contents it
had
the
unless the
clear option
(,C) is specified for the
previous
program

Any DIBOL record

cleared.

record.

Executing
to

error

1-8

CHAIN

valid
message

statement

DIBOL
binary
ILLEGAL CHAIN.

DIBOL LANGUAGE

with

program

argument which does
in

the

RUN

command

not

correspond

results

the

DATA MANIPULATION
1.2.4

Data

Manipulation

Statements

statements convert data from numeric to alphanumeric
calculate
arithmetic
fields
and
versa,
expressions, clear
format
data.
The
records, move data between fields or records, and
stored in a destination area.
of
source area are
contents
a
Record
names are
used in data manipulation statements only when data is moved
or
The form of the statement is:
cleared.
Data

and

manipulation

vice

destination

source

where:
is

source

variable,

which
destination
data

destination
is

the

area

literal,
to

identifying

expression
and

manipulated

then

copied

into

area.

where

the

manipulated

data

stored.

The source
destination area must be defined in the Data Division.
and
converted
always
justified to the data type defined for the
destination area.
Data in the source remains unchanged;
the destination area is always altered.
The
is

Variables:

quantity that
following three

can

formats

assigned
are

used

any

with

given

set

values.

The

variables:

name
name

name

(subscript)
(position m, position n)

where:
name

is
a

label (maximum
a
record or field.

six

characters)

used

identify

name(subscript)
represents

subscripted

array;

the

subscript

must

or
numeric
an arithmetic expression whose value
is
in
between 1 and the dimension specified for the array
If name does not identify an array,
the Data Division.
of
or
the value of the subscript exceeds the dimension
that
other locations in memory are referenced.
array,
are
No error message
is
unless
locations
generated
referenced outside of the Data Division.

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

1-9

position n)
those
characters
of subscripting references
Position n
to position n inclusive.
position m
must be greater than or equal to position m;
position
n
should be less than or equal to the dimension of the

(position

name

This
from

form

be
Positions m and n must
array associated with name.
If
with
l or greater.
characters
a value of
numeric
the variable name is subscripted, the successive
array
elements should be considered strung out left to right.

Example:
Data

Division defines A

A(3,9)

;Wants

;A(2),

4D4

from
7 digits, 2
and 1 from A(3).

A(l),

all

Literals:

Numeric

literals consist

sequence

from

Alphanumeric literals consist of a sequence of
cept single quotes) enclosed in single quotes.

COS—310

digits.
characters

(ex-

literal

is used anywhere in the Procedure
Division
where
a
for XMIT (on channels opened for O, T, or L by an
allowed
INIT statement), for WRITE, or as the source in
a
data
manipulation
statement.
It is similar to an alphanumeric literal except it begins
with a double quote (") and ends with a single quote (').
A

RECORD

record

Example:
PROC
XMIT

(8,"HELLO')

;HELLO is

RECORD

literal.

Example:
RECORD

REC

A5
Al

FLD2,

FLDl,

PROC

FLDl

'HELLO'

FLDZ
XMIT

'THERE'

;HELLO
;THERE

alphanumeric literal.

(8,REC)

Expressions:
An
one

ordered set of characters
idea or value.

1-10

DIBOL LANGUAGE

treated

its

totality

symbol

for

Data Conversion

1.2.4.1

Numeric values

can

converted

of
purposes
input, output,
data.
This is done with the

destination

Alphanumeric
are

replaced

data

and

manipulation

and vice versa for the
verification of numeric
statement:

source

numeric

alphanumeric

calculations,

conversions
Numeric

zeros.

are

and
spaces
right-justified,
alphanumeric conversions are

If the numeric ex—
right-justified, and zeros are replaced by spaces.
pression equals zero, the alphanumeric field will contain only a zero.

alphanumeric destination
alphanumeric destination
numeric destination
numeric destination

alphanumeric
=

numeric
numeric

source

source
source

alphanumeric

source

;1eft-justified
;right-justified
;right-justified
;right—justified

be
15
or
values to be converted to numeric must
fewer
in
If the alphanumeric field contains characters
length.
digits, spaces, and the signs + or -, the message BAD DIGIT
run
time.
The data conversion statement should be preceded
the
source
by an ON ERROR statement if the contents of
alphanumeric
may contain bad digits.

Alphanumeric

characters
other than
results at

Data conversion is used to edit
ACCEPT statement. Data is typed
converted to a numeric field by

and verify numeric data
an
following
into an alphanumeric field and is then
a data manipulation
statement preceded
ON ERROR statement.
an
by
Spaces and signs are not counted as char—
acters that are moved.
Spaces in the alphanumeric field are
ignored.
If the ON
Signs may be imbedded anywhere in the alphanumeric field.
ERROR statement is executed, the data entered was not numeric.

Arithmetic Expressions

1.2.4.2

Arithmetic

pulation
scripted

expressions

statement.

data

are

The

elements,

allowed

expression
constants,

as the
source
in a data
mani—
contain numeric elements, suband
arithmetic
variables,
opera—

only
can

tors.

There are five
of
priority.

binary arithmetic operators which are executed in order
with the same priority are executed left to
Operators

right.
#

(rounding)
(division)

(multiplication)

(addition)
(subtraction)

Order of priority:
1.
rounding
2.
multiplication and division
3.
addition and subtraction

DIBOL LANGUAGE

l-ll

These
The

operators

signs

are

used

with

numeric

used

values.

COS-310
indicate

binary

or
as unary
operamathematical
operation to
tors.
binary operators they
no
efAs unary operators, the + has
be performed in an expression.
the unary
fect;
negates the numeric value to which it is affixed.

—,

can

the

The

operator #

can

used

convert

decimal
code.
This code
equivalent
In this application, # appears before
A

the

field

numeric

alphanumeric

an
can

character

then be used by
For
character.
and

the

its

program.

example:

alphanumeric

If
B
contains
the
characters XYZ, X is
;field.
the
decimal
and
;converted to its internal
code,
is
in
stored
A.
;equivalent, 57,
D,

numeric

;containing
;equivalent
;added
Since

expressions

100*A/2+3-l

Fl=

100*

with

and

After
of the first
and stored in

parentheses

altered
ority can be
expressions, A=10.
Fl=

field

the

field
decimal
is
57,

alphanumeric

conversion,

XYZ.

character

the

first,

the

parentheses.

are

executed

use

order

the

of prifollowing

502
700

(A/2+3—l)

Rounding:
increments
Rounding sets variables to specified character formats and
by l the least significant digit if the digit to the right before forThe sign #
after
matting was 5 or more (sign is unchanged).
appears
The format for rounding is:
the character being rounded.
destination

is rounded by B
is
and
treated
character that is
A

A#B
B is not greater than 7
(becomes modulo
places;
as
a positive
The sign # appears after
integer.
being rounded.

TEMP=MONEY#2
If

MONEY

was

123456,

TEMP

becomes

1235.

MONEY

was

123446,

TEMP

becomes

1234.

MONEY

was

—l473,

Typically,

this

1-12

LANGUAGE

DIBOL

feature

TEMP

used

for

becomes

-15.

rounding

the

dollar.

8)
the

Division:
The result
numbers.

division

operation is

The result of 5/3 is l and -l4/5
division by zero is attempted.

expressed

—2.

error

whole

unrounded

message

when

occurs

Multiplication, Addition, Subtraction:
These

arithmetic

basic

are

the resulting value
the destination field,

error

message

will

result)

the

leftmost

that
intermediate

digits

execute

requested.

the size
without

exceeds

dropped

are

of
an

being displayed.

Clearing Fields and Records

1.2.4.3

Data manipulation
form:

destination

The

operations

(or

statements

fields

clear

and

records

used

when

the

can

name

designating

single field,

record,

are
cleared
to
all spaces;
array.
Alphanumeric destinations
of
a
field
numeric destinations are cleared to all zeros.
Any part
can
be
accessed in a program statement by subscripting the beginning
An array
name
without
and ending positions of the character string.
any subscripts clears only the first element in the array.
an

When
to

record

cleared,

all

numeric

and

fields

alphanumeric

are

set

areas

spaces.

Examples:
and

Fl(5,7)=

;Clears characters

Al(5)=

;Clears

Al(A)=

;Clears element

Fl(l,l)=

;Clears

the

first

character

Al=

;Clears the

first

element

RECNAM=

;Clears

Record

names

though

they

one

can

were

another

the

fifth

RECNAM

subscripted
in
and

array.
of the

element

field

Fl.

array.

array Al.

all
to

F1.

array Al.

spaces.

allow

reference

All

records

same

length.

record

DIBOL

referenced must

LANGUAGE

1-13

Example:
RECORD CUSNAM

,A3
RECORD BYRNAM

,A3
PROC

RECORD(2)=

Mdving Alphanumeric Data

1.2.4.4

the

Use

;Clears RECORD BYRNAM.

data manipulation
field (source)

phanumeric

destination

statement
to

another

move

the

contents

alphanumeric field

one

al—

(destination).

source

shorter
data
from
is
than
source
destination,
and
the
characters
of
destination
are
undis—
left—justified,
rightmost
If source is longer than
the
charturbed.
destination,
rightmost
in
source are not moved
into destination.
The source remains
acters
If

source

unchanged.
Example:
RECORD ALPHA

A,A5,'ABCDE'
B,A3,'FGH'
RECORD NAMES

NAME,A4,'FRED'
NAME1,A7,'JOHNSON'
PROC

1.2.4.5

Use

;Field

NAME=NAME1

;NAME would

Moving Numeric

source
source

is
is

DIBOL

contain FGHDE.
contain JOHN.

move

the

contents

one

numer-

source

shorter

longer,

tination.

1-14

Data

the data manipulation statement
field to another numeric field.

destination
If
If

would

A=B

LANGUAGE

than destination, zeros are
the most significant digits

inserted
are

not

on the left.
moved to des-

Example:
RECORD A

123
45678

D3,
FIGR1,D5,

FIGR,
RECORD

45678
123

NUMBl,D5,
NUMB2,D3,
PROC

1.2.4.6

FIGRl

FIGR

NUMBZ

NUMBl

Moving

Records

;FIGRl would
;NUMB2 would

contain

00123.
678.

can be
accomplished with data manipulation
within a record are treated collectively as
The
record
manipulation
alphanumeric fields
during
manipulation.
statement has the form:

Movement

entire

records
fields

All

statements.

destination

source

where:

destination
is
is

source

record

label

record
label,
literal.

record

subscripted
subscripted

record

label.

label,

statement moves the contents of the source into
reserved in the destination.
If the source is shorter than
the destination, the rightmost characters of
destination
are
undis—
If source is longer, the rightmost characters of source will
turbed.
not be moved into the destination.

This

data

the

space

manipulation

Example:
RECORD

PRTREC

RECORD

DATA

,A92
NAME

A25

ADDR

A20

CITY

A20

A5
A2
A5

STATE,
ZIP

PROC
PRTREC=DATA
XMIT

;Move DATA

into

PRTREC.

(8,PRTREC)

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

l—15

1.2.4.7

Data

Formatting

to
formatted into an alphanumeric field
marks
which are not stored with the
calcu—
records on disk, and which cannot be present during arithmetic
lations.
This is done with the following data manipulation statement:

Any numeric data field
contain

and

spaces

can

punctuation

Alphanumeric variable

numeric

specifies special characters
expression.
Format

expression,
to

format

inserted

with

the

numeric

Example:
A

'—XXX,XXX.ZZ'

The eight-digit numeric at D is converted to alphanumeric code, reformatted with specified punctuation, and stored in alphanumeric field A.
The
on

format
the

the
l-3

string

printer

must

the

Most characters
alphanumeric expression.
be
can
used
in
a
format
keyboard
string, but use

following special characters with
explains the special use of these

care:
X, Z,
characters.

—,

Table

Examples:
AMT
mat

Each
must

is an alphanumeric field the
string:

associated

the

;AMT contains

123

AMT=123,'ZZZZZZ'

;AMT contains

123

AMT=123,'*XXXXX'

;AMT contains

***123

AMT=-1123,'—XXX,XXX'

;AMT

AMT=123,'$*XXX.XX-'

;AMT contains

$***l.23—

AMT=123456,'—XX.XX'

;AMT

contains

—12.34

period,

counted

slash,
a

minus

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

contains

for-

1,123

—

notation,
sign, or any other special
In the AMT=123,'$*XXX.XX—'
position.

character

example, AMT must be defined in
alphanumeric field.

1-16

size

AMT=123,'XXXXXX'

comma,

same

RECORD

statement

nine—character

Table 1-3
Special Characters

Character

Explanation
in

Used

printout.
zeros

Used

are

format
Each
X

numeric

arrange

represents

digit

field
for
and leading

automatically suppressed.
leading

suppress

when

zeros

formatting

out-

put.
*

Used in a
eliminate

format

and
string to replace leading zeros
If the * is
trailing
spaces on printout.
the
in
anyplace except the first character
string,
also
be
digits may
replaced.

arithmetic

number to be printed.
or
after the number.
If the number is positive, a space is substituted for
If the minus sign is placed in a po—
the minus sign.
sition following the first significant digit but preto the last position of a format string,
vious
it is
printed like any other insertion character.
Inserts

The

sign

be placed

can

before

point

the

decimal

comma

significant digits

a format
the left.

Inserts

zeros

decimal
the

right

format string and forces
point to be signi—

ficant.

Used

are

All

tion

other

COS—310
characters.

insert

characters

are

treated

string

unconditional

there

inser—

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-17

DISPLAY
1.2.5

DISPLAY

DISPLAY
cursor

used
The

only
form

Input/Output

used

Statement

show messages on the screen and
specified line and character position.
for special effects.
to

DISPLAY

the

DISPLAY

statement

literal
afield
dfield

(y,x,

move

Numeric

the
screen
fields are

is:

)

where:
Y

is a numeric
number.
If
the
the
A

number of
last line

the
screen
line
number is greater than
the cursor is moved to

expression representing
the specified line
lines on a screen,
on
the screen.

with y equal to 0 outputs a message
the
present location of the cursor.
positioning is done and x is ignored.

statement

ning

zero,

beginIf

is a numeric expression representing the character
position.
If the specified character position is greater
than the
width of the screen, the results
are
unpredictable.
literal

an
or
numeric
a
character
alphanumeric
string
An
must be enclosed in
string.
alphanumeric
string
single quotes (') and is displayed at the character position
There
is
no carriage return/line
specified.

feed after the message;
character position at the
afield

dfield

the

an alphanumeric
field containing
displayed.

special numeric
to

code

DIBOL LANGUAGE

causes

the

message.
a

message

particular

special

op—

occur.

The following numerics
by the COS—310 system.

\INI—‘O

that

remains

cursor

eration

1-18

the
end

are

recognized

Position cursor.
Clear to end-of-screen.
Clear to end—of—line.
Sound terminal alarm.

codes

number is to be displayed, the numeric field
must
converted to an alphanumeric field before it can be
displayed on the screen.
If

Examples:
terminal

DISPLAY(0,0,7)

;Sound

DISPLAY(10,1,1)

;Clear

DISPLAY(2,20,DAY)

;Beginning

alarm.

from line 10,
;to end-of—screen.
line

;display the

contents

character

character
of DAY.

DISPLAY(1,10,0)

;Position cursor at first line,
710th character position.

DISPLAY(11,37,2)

;Clears line ll
;of the line.

DISPLAY(0,0,'DATE')

;Starting

;display the
DISPLAY(11,12,7)

DISPLAY(Y,X,ALARM)

the

current
DATE.

;Position

cursor

the

Data

character

word

;position
;If

from

and

cursor

position
position

the

end

position,

line 11, character
sound terminal alarm.
at

Division contains:

RECORD

Y,D2,20
X,D2,36
ALARM, Dl,7
;the cursor is set at line 20,
;character position 36 and an
;audible alarm is sounded.

DISPLAY(1,1,'HELLO')

;Display
;(line 1,

in the upper left—hand
character 1) of the screen.

corner

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-19

HELLO

END
1.2.6

END

This

optional

statement

has

Compiler

Statement

statement

the

last

statement

program.

The

form:

END[/x]
where:

one

the

following option switches.

compiler
the
a

printed.

DIBOL

source

program

storage

map

source

program

storage

map

LANGUAGE

screen.

compiler

statement option switch or
switch
(/N, /G, /T) in the
option
map listing is printed, the label

1-20

pro—

displays a
listing on

END

not

source

no
options are specified,
listing is printed as usual.

are

compiler

suppresses the printing of
gram storage map listing.

lack

compiler
count

and

can

overridden

command.
If
number of
free

RUN

with

storage

locations

FINI
1.2.7

FINI

Input/Output

disassociates

statement

specified

The

file

records may

statement

has

FINI
FINI

the

number

FINI

is only

opened.

from

channel

statement.
update files, but
INIT

storage output and
to close each data

closed,

Statement

it
an

the

necessary

mode
for

as
mass

good
programming
practice
output or an update file is not

lost.
the

form:

(channel)

where:
is

channel

nel

numeric
number

chan—
(1—15) which specifies a
associated with a mode by an INIT

expression
which

was

statement.

The
FINI

following information is
statement

files

useful

associated

in
for

the

determining
various

effect

uses.

INIT

mode

Effect of FINI

Reading

from
read
number.
0

file

the

stops.

beginning.

end-of-file (EOF) mark
and the length of
Disassociates
directory.
An

closed,

Reading/writing

channel

the

Statement

File may be reopened and
Disassociates
channel

is written,
the
file
the file is written in
channel number.

file

is
the

Disassociates

stops.

number.

K,T,L

Disassociates

Reading

channel
file

stops.

channel

number.

the

Disassociates

number.
Cannot

reopened.

Examples:
FINI

(l)

;Disassociates channel 1

FINI

(A+B)

;Uses

the

sum

A+B

from

;disassociates that channel

device and

file.

channel
and
number,
from a device and file.

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-21

FORMS
1.2.8

The

FORMS

Input/Output Statement
is

statement

FORMS

used

format

printer output

and

has

the

form:

(channel,skip-code)

where:
channel

is a numeric
associated
with
the
(1-15)
expression
in
a previous
INIT statement.
If the channel
printer
statespecified is not associated with a printer, the
ment is ignored.

skip-code is

numeric expression which causes
the
of
the page (0) or to
top
lines specified (1 to 4095).
a

Negative
If

the

numbers

cause

the

printer

skip

the

number

go
of

unpredictable results.

the

code exceeds 4095, then 4096 is subtracted
from
code and the remainder is used as the skip-code.

Example:
INIT(l,L)

FORMS(1,3)

is the channel number
;INIT statement and 3 is
;left blank.

specified in
the

number

previous
lines

Example:
INIT(5,L)

FORMS(5,0)

;5
;to

1-22

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

is the channel number and 0 sends
the top of the printer page.

the

listing

GO TO
1.2.9

GO TO

Control

Statement

The GO TO statement branches program control to a line in
label.
GO
TO
has
The
statement
the
identified
by

unconditional

form of
GO

two

program
forms:

computed.

Unconditional GO To

1.2.9.1

The

and

the

unconditional

the

is:

label

where:
is the label assigned to a statement
dure Division where control is to be

label

line in the Proce—
transferred.

Example:
GO

1.2.9.2

The

Computed

computed
GO

;Transfers control

TO SET

SET.

GO To

has

the

form:

(labell...,labeln),variable

where:

label]...,labeln
are

bels

(120
variable

statement

labels.
There can be any number
the
limit that can be stored on

la~

one

line

characters).

is a decimal
This
value.
is to branch.

or
variable
a
expression
representing
value identifies the label where control

number
is branched to the label corresponding to the sequence
If
indicated
the
variable.
the variable is negative, zero, or
by

Control

greater

than

statement

the
number
the program.

labels,

control

passes

the

Example:
GO TO

(LOOP,LIST,TOT),KEY

LOOP
if
KEY=l,
;Transfer control to
KEY=3.
if
or
if
TOT
;LIST
KEY=2,

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

1-23

IF
1.2.10

Control Statement

conditionally

statement

the
form of

result
the

statement

executes

relational
is:

certain

comparison

statements

between

the

basis

expressions.

The

(expressionl.rel.expressionZ)statement

where:
and

expressionl

are

expression2
literals, variables,

the

same

.rel.

one

the

Equal

.NE.

Not

.LT.

than
than or
Greater than
Greater than

one

label
label

equal
ex—

STOP

TRACE

RETURN
ON

equal

following control statements which is
relationship is true.

the
the

CALL

equal

Less

.GE.

Less

.GT.

ecuted

expressions

following relational operators:

.EQ.

.LE.

statement

arithmetic

type.

TRACE

label

ERROR

both
numof the same data type:
numeric comparison, the shorter field
comis internally filled to the length of the longer field, then the
is
made
between the longer field and the zero-filled field.
parison
In an alphanumeric comparison, the comparison is made on the number of
characters in the shorter field.
and

Expressionl

eric

the

program

both

result

expression2
alphanumeric.

sequence

must

the comparison
is executed.

not

the

true,

statement

Examples:
IF

(A.EQ.B)

(SLOT.NE.2)

LABEL3

CALL

;If
;is

equal

transferred

to
to

control
B,
LABEL3.

to
;If SLOT is not
equal
is
transferred
;control

BAD

2,
to

;BAD.

IF(SALES.LT.PROFIT+TAX-RENT)

TRACE

;If SALES

less

than

PROFIT

TAX
minus
the
RENT,
;plus
;TRACE command will terminate.

1-24

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

INCR
1.2.11

The

INCR

able

and

INCR

(increment)
has

the

statement
form:

adds

the

numeric

specified

vari-

INCR variable
where:

variable
INCR
to

numeric

variable

should only be used with positive
Its use is
add
one
to a counter.

incremented

numbers and
faster than

is
a

by l.
used
typically
manipulation

data

statement.

Example:
INCR A2

:Add

A2.

This

identical

meaning

;the data manipulation statement A2=A2+l.

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-25

INIT
1.2.12

INIT

Input/Output

Statement

on
associates a channel number with a logical unit
or
a character-oriented
input/output device and
initializes the device.
The form of the INIT statement is:

The
a

INIT

mass

statement

storage device

INIT

(channe1,mode[,fi1nam][,logical unit #])

where:

channel

is a
channel
numeric
a
specifies
expression which
number
to be associated with a logical unit or
(1-15)
character-oriented device.
This channel number is used
in the program to refer to the associated device.
If the
modulo
and

is
specified exceeds 15, it
interpreted
16 is subtracted from the number specified
remainder is used by the system.

number

16;

the

with
initially associated
following channels are
These asat program startup.
specified devices
signments can be changed with an INIT statement.

The
the

6
7
8
A

channel

the
the
the

channel
channel
channel

that

number
number
number

associated

for

the
the
the

with

for
for

logical unit

prior

FINI

statement

of
file
an
another
INIT.
Opening
output
the previous contents of the file to be deleted.

is the one—character mode designation of a device to be
The mode designaassociated
with the channel number.
tions are:

Mode

Meaning

Explanation

OUT

UPDATE

storage device

Mass

Mass
to

(logical
input.

unit)

storage device (logical
used for output.

unit)

storage device

unit)

Mass

used

input

for

LANGUAGE

(logical

used for direct
and output.

(Continued

DIBOL

screen.

storage device must be closed by

1-26

printer.
keyboard.

mass

causes

mode

is
is
is

access

page)

both

Mode

Meaning

KBD

Input

TTY

Output to

LPT

Output

SYS

Input from a source file located on
This file name
the
system device.

Explanation
from

screen.

printer.

been

have
command.

must

filnam

keyboard.

specified

RUN

identifies
is an alphanumeric literal or variable that
A data file name is
the data file on the logical unit.
is
and
illegal
necessary with the I, O, and U modes,
with other modes.
If

file

the

name

message

already

located

REPLACE?
A

REPLACE?
this file

not

present for

the

output,

designated

another

MOUNT
file is

logical

unit,

input,

displayed.

temporary file
be
$
may

with

displayed.

name

such

file

name

beginning

When this file name is used, no
is generated because the
recognizes
program
name
as
temporary and replaces it.
used.

logical unit #
is an optional numeric expression which
the
specifies
logical unit (1-15) where the data file is stored or is
to

stored.

the

number

tracted

from

specified
it

and

exceeds

the

15,

remainder

16
then
is used by

sub—

the

sys-

tem.

is good programming practice to specify the
data file name.
Data file names should be
are
avoided.
messages
It

the

logical unit number and
unique so that REPLACE?

Example:
INIT

(15,I,'RENEW',6)

;Initializes channel number 15 for
;RENEW is
;on

the name of
logical unit 6.

input.

input file

found

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-27

the

0N ERROR

1.2.13

The

ON ERROR

ERROR

when

ment

the

nonfatal

form

The

ERROR

executed
ON

statement.

immediately

occur.

prior
of

Statement

branches

statement

ERROR

gram

Control

this

ERROR

control to a specified
statein the statement following
be written into the source
pro—

program
error

occurs

can

statement

where

possible

error

might

is:

statement

label

where:

is a label assigned to
Division where control

label

statement

the

Procedure

transferred.

Example:

DEC

would
if
DEC

which
;Statement
TRAP
to
;control
;nonfatal error.

ERROR TRAP

branch
=ALPHA

program
creates

ALPHA

The ON ERROR statement prevents
lowing run-time errors.

return

Monitor

the

for

the

fol—

XMIT

Explanation

Message

BAD

DIGIT

END

is
used
non—numeric
digit
alphanumeric-to-numeric conversion.

FILE

end—of—file

label

not

was

specified

statement.

RECORD

ILLEGAL

LINE

TOO

LONG

Record number is too large
in the record header
fied
length of the XMIT record.

Input line overflowed

the

length

does

not

word

record

speci-

match

the

was

which

into

read.
NO

FILE

file

(SYS)
NUMBER

TOO

LONG

ZERO

DIVISOR

1-28

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

specified

RUN

command

satisfy

INIT

statement.

field
lation.

Division

zero

than

digits

attempted.

used

calcu-

PROC
1.2.14

The

PROC

DIBOL

—

statement
It

program.
PROC

Statement

Compiler

separates

the

form:

the

Data

and

Divisions

Procedure

[n][/x][;comment]

where:
is

0-7
(not an expression),
indicating
of logical units which the program
If no number is
simultaneously.
speci—

single digit,

the

maximum

will

have

number

open
the compiler assumes 7.
The available memory is
divided into buffers to handle the
number
of
logical
The
more
buffers
the
units
specified.
specified,
smaller they must be.
Smaller buffers generally result
in
slower
data file processing and faster
sequential
random data file processing.

fied,

program opens more logical units
in the PROC statement, a run-time

the

ified

one

suppresses

lists

displays

The

PROC
or

switch

the

source

errors

and

errors

active

until

program

spec-

occurs.

program.

the

printer.
the

screen.

disabled

If no option
option switch.
compiler listing is printed.

statement

specified,

the

and

program

source

END

program;

is an
which

compiler listing

option switch

START

were

following option switches:

the

comment

than
error

COMP

RUN

all

command

overrides

printout except

/L's

errors

in
/T's
suppressed.

of text preceded by
a
semicolon
for output as a heading for the Procedure
the compiler listing.
When
the
comencounters the PROC statement, the printer moves
piler
to the top of the next page and outputs the comment
as
a header
line.

optional string

is stored
Division of

Examples:
;Printer will go

PROC
PROC

4/L;

TEST

PROG.

;Four

mass

storage

top—of—the-page.

logical

units

will

source
open,
program
listing and
the
;errors will be listed on
printer,

;be

;the page

heading

will

TEST

PROG.

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-29

READ

direct

The

Input/Output

access

from

moved
form:

READ

named

Statement

statement

allows

file

specified

data record to
in memory.
It has

specified

area

be
the

(channel,record,rec#)

where:

channel

numeric

expression with

a value of
1-15 specifying
links the READ statement to the
The INIT statement must specithe mode.

channel number which
related INIT statement.

fy Input
is

record

the

name

Update

record

the

into

which

data

read.
is a numeric or arithmetic
number of the record to be

rec#

the

program

dictable

(see

expression

specifying

the

read.

reads past the end—of—file mark, the
for
Section
1.2.22
restrictions

results
READ

are

and

unpreWRITE

usage.)

Examples:
READ

(5,REX,88)

device
linked
;Reads the 88th record of the
channel
the
which
was opened with
the
;to
the
;INIT (5,...) statement and places it in
;memory

READ

(6,BLT,EXPR)

;Reads

area

the

;expression
;area

1-30

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

labeled

labeled
record
and

EXPR

BLT.

REX.

specified
stores

the

memory

RECORD
1.2.16

RECORD

Definition Statement

Data

where
data
is
stored
memory
without field statement infor—
mation is of no use in the program.
The total size of the data fields
An unnamed record
within a named record cannot exceed 510 characters.
be
can contain no more
than 4094 characters.
can
Only named records
used
in an I/O operation.
Without a name, the record can act only as
The RECORD statement has the form:
a
temporary storage area.
The

RECORD

during

statement

processing.

RECORD

reserves

RECORD

areas

statement

]

[name][

where:
the record, begins
with
an
letter,
alphabetic
a
contains
maximum of six significant characters, and
The name is optional un*
is unique within the program.
less the record is to be referenced for data transfer.

name

names

allows one record to be overlayed into the same area as
another.
The X must be preceded by a comma.
More than
one
define the same record, but the overoverlay may
laying record must be equal to or smaller than the record being overlayed.
A series
of
records
overlaying
must be
preceded by a record without a ,X.
Overlaying
is useful in reformatting
a
data
previously defined
record area.

clears

the

contents

record

loaded

CHAIN

com—

numeric fields are set to zeros and all alphanumeric fields are set to blanks if no initial value
been
Do not use ,X and ,C in the same
has
specified.
no
error
will occur, but the program will
record;
igall

mand;

nore

the

,C.

Accompanying field information is

the

form:

[fldnam],

[m]xn[,initial value][

,P
,S

]

where:

fldnam,

optional

name

that

used without the
reference the individual

can

A
identifies the file.
comma
if the program does not

fldnam
field.

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-31

count character used to indi—
values that can be referenced with a
The values must be of the same type
single field name.
and
size
and can be initially entered as a continuous
size
string separated by commas following the type and
to
be
invalues
of
an
need
Not
all
array
designation.
serted at the program's inception.

optional repetition

cate

array

indicates the
numeric D.

field

type

indicates

number
in

510

the

alphanumeric)

the

either

characters
field.

alphanumeric

(maximum 15 numeric,

,initial value
in
an optional value
the
field.
inserted
initially
Must agree in type and size with the xn designation.
,D

optional switch which

Monitor
and
by the data field
same field
as
,P.
the

current
date
from
calls the
inserts it at the location designated
in
the
information.
Cannot be used

asks
for
Cannot
keyboard.

the

Enter

,D.

when the program is ready for
the insertion of information via
be used in the same
field
as
a

optional switch which,

execution,

all

information

alphanumeric.

optional character used to assign
equal to the options used at

variable

the
run

value
time.

Example:
RECORD

;Record named INVENT.
with
five
numeric
;Field named THINKO
;characters.
four
named
THINKl
with
;Array
;7—character values.
named
STKOPT
initialized
to
'OPTION';Field

INVENT

THINKO,

THINKl,

4D7

STKOPT,

A6,

;OPTION.

BNKBAL, D7,1234567
TRNSDT, D6, D
INPUT, A10, P

;Numeric field initialized to 1234567.
;Field to enter date from the Monitor.
characters
;Field to allow entry to ten

A2,

allow
of
values
;Field to
/xx
entry
;from R PROG /xx.
;Clears record loaded by CHAIN command.

;from
RUNSW,

RECORD, C
NAME,
RECORD, X
LNAME,
FNAME,

1-32

A20

keyboard.

;Alphanumeric field
;Unnamed
;record.

A10
A10

DIBOL LANGUAGE

record

;Alphanumeric field
;Alphanumeric field

with

characters.

overlay

preceding

with 10 characters.
named FNAME.

RETURN
1.2.17

The

RETURN

Control Statement

statement

RETURN

subroutine.

has

the

placed

the

logical

end

internal

form:

RETURN
statement returns control
the
last
CALL statement or
statement transfered control.

The

RETURN

lowing

to
to

the
the

RETURN WITHOUT CALL error message results
when no CALL or TRAP has been executed.
A

immediately

statement

location

from which

RETURN

fol—
TRAP

attempted

Example:

CALL
4

SET
I

STOP
PROFIT=PRICE-COST

SET,

STOP
CALL CTAX
—->A=...

RETURN

———————————

TAX=PROFIT/2

CTAX,

(TAX.GT.MAX)

CALL

ERROR

—-RETURN
This

example

one

subroutine

statements

shows

and

the

execution control
next.
The solid
broken lines show the
how

the

branches

to and returns
from
lines show the result of CALL
result of RETURN statements.

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

1-33

START
1.2.18

START

Compiler

Statement

This

optional statement can be used any number of times and can be inEach time a START statement is
serted anywhere in the source program.
encountered during compilation, a top-of-page command occurs and a new
is
START is frequently used to segment major
page
heading
printed.
sections

has

programs.

the

form:

STARTI/x][;comment]
where:

/N
/L

one

the

following option switches:

suppresses
resumes

compiler listing

listing

source

program.

and

program

errors

printer.
/T

resumes

display

source

program

and

errors

the

screen.

switch is
until
disabled
active
by
switch.
If no option switch is specion
the
fied, a compiler listing is produced
printer.
The switches can be overridden with an option switch in
the RUN COMP command.
The START option
another
option

;comment

optional method to stipulate a line of
output as a heading on the compiler listing.
an

text

the RUN COMP command, it overrides /L or
/T
and
stops output of everything except errors.
program
will still determine to what device errors are output.

/N is specified in

the

source

and

in
The

Example:
START;WAREHOUSE INFORMATION
;The printer will begin
list
WAREHOUSE
;will

the

top

INFORMATION

of
as

the
page
the title of

and
the

;page.

START/T

;Resumes
;screen.

1-34

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

display

source

program

and

errors

the

STOP
1.2.19

STOP
It

the

STOP

Control

Statement

terminates program execution and
be
inserted anywhere in the
statement is:

can

returns control to the
Monitor.
Procedure Division.
The form of

STOP

There
close

can

files;
files

than
FINI

one

STOP

previously opened by

The STOP statement has the
used as the last statement

must

INIT

same

effect

program.

statement

a program.
STOP does not
inserted before the STOP to

statement.

END,

but

END

DIBOL

can

only

LANGUAGE

1-35

TRACE/N0 TRACE
1.2.20

These

TRACE/NO

TRACE

Debugging

Statement

are debugging
tools
used
to
follow
the
order
of
execution.
TRACE/NO TRACE can be written any place in the
Procedure Division of a program.
The appearance of
TRACE
statements
in
a
does not cause any TRACE output to be generated unless
program
the /T option is specified when the RUN command is given.
The form of

statements

statement

the

is:

statement

TRACE

the

Between

TRACE

and

When

program

tracing

ments

are

executed.

the

printer

TRACE

statements

are

program

statements

which

being debugged.

are

the

which

lowing

LINE

(xxxx

enabled,
TRACE

the

TRACE

causes

line

the

lists

the

following

order

message

which stateto be output

number):

xxxx

number identifies a data manipulation statement, the value
is
produced and stored by the statement is printed on the folline.
encounTracing continues until a NO TRACE statement is

line

tered.

Example:
AT

LINE

0200

000006

excessive
output
placement of TRACE statements causes
To
statement
to
best
use
the
TRACE
advantage, use IE
printer.
statements to isolate the problem to a certain part of the program and

Indiscriminate
to

the

then

use

1-36

DIBOL

TRACE

that part

LANGUAGE

the

program.

TRAP
1.2.21

The

TRAP

time

—

Control

allows

statement

that

output

TRAP

label

Statement

DIBOL

being printed.

same
the
program to be executed at
The format of the statement is:

where:

is the label of a printer
Division of the program.

label

Because

the

printer

(CPU),

the

TRAP

execute

buffer

rather

holds

the

much

execution resumes.
gram
or XMIT
statement.

following information

the

Procedure

unit
central
processing
allow the CPU to continue
A
for material to be
printed.
can
use
them.
printer

than

the

implemented

than having to wait
characters until the

Whenever the print buffer
and a call is
ily halts
statement executed.
When

The

slower

statement

subroutine

DIBOL statement execution temporarthe label specified in the last TRAP
RETURN is made from this call, normal pro-

empties,
made
a

The

TRAP

statement

necessary

FORMS

use

the

TRAP

INIT,

1/0

normally precedes

effectively

statement.

printer buffer empties during execution

the

XMIT,

READ,

progress,
statement
2.

WRITE,

DISPLAY,

the TRAP is delayed
is complete.

FINI

while
of
execution

statement

until

the

I/O

buffer empties during execution of
an
ACCEPT
the
ACCEPT
is
statement
while
the
interrupted
A noticeable delay occurs only
if
printer buffer is loaded.
the
buffer is filled during the time that the TRAP
keyboard
If

the

printer

statement,

subroutine

several
3.

being executed.

18
seconds.

approximately

characters

Since the keyboard
buffer
is
this filling usually takes

long,

Always construct a TRAP subroutine
printer is immediately followed by

so
a

that

RETURN

output

the

statement.

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

1-37

Printers

length
lines

ing

are

limited

using

the

when
results

output lines
TRAP

of'

126

statement.

characters

Outputting longer

in the program spending all of its time servicprinter TRAPs, thus cancelling the advantage of the TRAP

statement.

DIBOL

TRAP

program

slowed

down

approximately

10%

the

processor.

Example:
The following-example
while some other task

program outputs numbers
is being performed:

RECORD A
D3
PROC
TRAP

LOOP,

SUB

FORMS(6,0)

:Start LPT.

;Perform task.

(N.LT.500)

STOP

SUB,

N=N+l
IF (N.GT.500)
XMIT(6,A)
RETURN

1-38

DIBOL LANGUAGE

RETURN

LOOP

1—500

the

printer

WRITE
1.2.22

WRITE

direct

memory

Input/Output

WRITE

access

specified

WRITE

Statement

statement

moves

file.

has

the

data record
form:

from

area

(channel,record,rec#)

where:
is a numeric value
relates
the WRITE

channel

statement

INIT

must

specifying

1-15,

statement

have

which
The
device

channel

INIT

statement.

specified Update

the

mode.

record

rec#

the

which

record

from

which

expression specifying
data

data

the

output.
number

record

the

written.

Example:
WRITE

;Returns the 88th record from the memory
to
the
device
associated
with
;REX

(5,REX,88)

specified by

;channel
Several

r estrictions

have

been

placed

upon

the

INIT
use

area

the

(5,...).
of

and

READ

WRITE

statement s.

The

channel

involved must

refer

logical unit

mass

operations

must

storage device.
2.

The file to be accessed with READ
contain records of uniform size.

Only

one

mounted)
The
the

record which
same size
as

WRITE

volume of a‘ multivolume
file
can be accessed
by a READ/WRITE

Attempting
in

error

READ

Writing

error

one

currently

is specified from the Data Division must
the records of the file being accessed.
or

WRITE

and

message

Reading

(the

statement.

over

program

record

the end-of—file mark
termination.

after

end-of-file

results

usually results

Certain unpredictable conditions
message.
not crash the COS-310 system but will cause garbled data
or
a READ)
the loss of the output record (on a WRITE).
an

Unless

is used before
terminating
has
Update files, the data from the
statements will not be output properly.

program
WRITE

FINI

which

statement

will

(on

a
DIBOL
last few

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-39

XMIT
1.2.23

The

XMIT

—

Input/Output Statement

statement transfers

XMIT

data

record

and

the

form:

(channel,record[,eof label])

where:
channel

numeric

expression

number which associates
lated INIT statement.
record

(1-15)
the

XMIT

specifying
statement

with

channel
the

re—

is a name previously used in a RECORD
statement
which
in memory to which or from which
identifies
the
area
sub—
It may be a simple or
data is to be transmitted.
or
a
record
literal.
variable,
scripted
A
with
care.
used
should only be used
The
consecutive
records.
equal
length
must have a name but the others may be un—

Subscripted record
single
subseript,
if there are
first record
named.

names

such

must
as

REC(3),

Examples:
RECORD

REC

;REC(1)

,D6
,AlO

;REC(2)

RECORD

,D6
,AlO
RECORD

;REC(3)

,D6
,AlO
If a double subscript form is used,
REC
(n,m),
e.g.,
n must
then
be less than m—l, n must be odd and m must
be even (or the last character in
the
This
record).
double
subscript form refers to characters n—2 through
m—2 inclusive in the record.
If
it
refers
to
n=1,

characters

referring

to
n
in
acter
COS-310 word

n=l.

1-40

DIBOL

LANGUAGE

m-2.
Whenever
an XMIT occurs
through
the record, two
characters
before
char—
the
record
are
this is the
destroyed;
Do not be concerned about this
if
count.

eof

label

to
which
the
is the label
of
a
statement
program
It is used with
branches
if
an
end—of-file is read.
closed
automati—
The input file is
input files only.
an end—of—file
is read.
If a label is not
cally when
is
when
an
error
an
output
specified,
message
end—of—file
occurs.
The same effect of an end—of-file

label can be achieved by an ON ERROR
ing the XMIT without an end—of—file.

statement

preced-

Examples:
XMIT

(3,INV,EOF)

;Transfers a record
with
;associated

;(3,IN,..), to the
INV.
;labeled
control
;reached,

from

the

file

input

INIT
the
statement
record area in memory
If
is
end-of-file

the
branches
to
Division
statement
labeled
of
the
the
record
length
read is greater than the defined
is output at run
an error message
If the size of the record being

;Procedure
If
;EOF.

;being
;size,
;time.

;read is smaller than the defined
size,
;the record is left—justified and padded
This

;with spaces on the right.
the
;is
just
opposite

of
which

format
the
data
does
an

;manipulation statement
;alphanumeric-to—alphanumeric operation.
XMIT

(l,CUST,NEXT)

file
;Transfers a record from the input
with
the
;associated
INIT(1,I,...)
At
;statement to the RECORD area CUST.
it
branches
labeled NEXT.

the

;Takes a record
it
;and
puts

from
RECORD
in
the
file

area

BUFF

;with

INIT(2,...)

;end-of—file,
;statement
XMIT

(2,BUFF)

the

associated
statement
for

channel 2 is initialized
;(assuming
;output, printer, etc.).
XMIT

(8,

"HI

THERE')

;Would output the message
terminal
;the
operator's
;was

XMIT

(8,CUST(1,7),EOF)

INITed

;Accesses

the

;the record

the

first

area

THERE

channel

TTY.

five

characters

CUST.

DIBOL LANGUAGE

1-41

CHAPTER
THE

2.1

MASTER CONTROL

MONITOR

PROGRAM

Monitor is the master control program
contains all the system I/O handlers:

The

Terminal

Mass

Printer

Monitor

enables

COS—310

system.

edit,

save, and execute
all programs stored on
close files as needed.

programs.
the system

program execution, the Monitor produces the messages
the user to mount files.
It also provides the means

which
infor batch—

also
maintains
device and lets you

struct

the

Storage

During

for

ing commands

for

you
a

directory

label,

open,

compile,
of

and

sequential execution.

The editing feature of the Monitor can be used
to
create
DFU
File
tables
and
source files on the system device.
Utility)
tables and files may be stored for later use.

Table 2-1 lists the
on—line operations.

Monitor

Keyboard

Commands

that

are

(Data
These

available

Table

2—1

Keyboard Commands

Monitor

Keyboard
Function

Command

CTRL/C

control

Returns
a

the

awaits

and

dot

Monitor.

The
If

command.

ready in control, CTRL/C has the
CTRL/U.
CTRL/O

Monitor

the
same

displays

Monitor
effect

Suppresses terminal echo of typed output.

al-

echo

the
terminal
restores
CTRL/O
suppressed,
echo.
CTRL/O is also used to halt and resume
output
The echo always
from
an LI
command or the compiler.
the dot is printed.
All
resumes the next time
sup—
pressed output is lost.

already

CTRL/Q

Resumes

was

output
halted

the

screen

CTRL/S

No
Halts output to screen.
CTRL/Q will resume output.

CTRL/U

Deletes

the

Signals

the

CTRL/Z

Monitor.

from

the

point

which

data

lost.

by CTRL/S.

current

output

input line.

end of input
Halts
output

and
of

returns

line

to
the
control
from an LN

numbers

_command.
DELETE

Erases

to
RETURN

2-2

THE

that

the last character typed
character's position.

Indicates

MONITOR

that

line

and

moves

the

input is complete.

cursor

2.1.1

The

MOUNT Messages

Monitor

displays

messages on the screen whenever an
must be specified.
These messages

MOUNT

output logical unit number

input
have

the

form:
MOUNT

filnam #nn

FOR

INPUT:

MOUNT

filnam

#nn

FOR

OUTPUT:

the

name

where:
filnam

the

data

file

desired

the

program

currently executing.
is

#nn

Respond
the

volume

number

this message with the
location of the data

the

cates

the

type CTRL/U and

reply,

the

logical

63)
unit

storage unit.

correct

the

file.

data

number(l-15)
If

error

which indiis made in

reply.

The MOUNT message is displayed and the volume
number
is
incremented
whenever
the
reaches the end of the mass storage device yet
program
more
information remains to be read or written.

logical unit numbers specified in control programs
able, a question mark precedes the MOUNT message:

When

filnam #01

?MOUNT

Respond
The
the

FOR

different

logical unit

following message is displayed when a file
logical unit specified in a MOUNT message:
filnam

#nn

not

avail—

INPUT:

this message with

REPLACE

are

number.

already

stored

REPLACE with a Y to replace the
old
answer
with
file;
any
File labels beginning with any
other
character to keep the old file.
character other than A—Z, ], ", or [, are considered to
be
temporary
files, and no REPLACE message is displayed.
Answer

output

name
previously unused logical unit, a garbled file
in
is
the
REPLACE
This
bedisplayed
message.

volume number may be
cause random characters
be.
Answer the REPLACE
or

are

message

the storage unit where the label
with YES to replace the garbled

THE

should

file.

MONITOR

2-3

2.1.2

Procedures

Operating

routine each
it is loaded

The Monitor is loaded via a bootstrap
started.
The
Monitor
signals that
the
message:
playing
COS

MONITOR

is
time the system
into memory by dis-

(or current version number)

8.00

DATE?

proceed, type DATE (or DA), a space, the current date in
The date must be entered before proceeding.
dd-mmm—yy.
is used during program execution to date
files,
reports,

the

This date

created

and

form

newly

programs.

Monitor

other
commands
indicates that it is ready to
by
accept
file START.
dot
or
the
batch
either
a
(.)
by executing
displaying
SYSGEN
START is executed if you selected the batch file option in the
operation (see Section 3.1 for SYSGEN operation).
The

2.2

The

MONITOR COMMANDS

following

commands

apply

BATCH

sequentially

DATE

stores

DELETE

erases

programs

DIRECTORY

prints

the

PLEASE

displays

RUN

loads

SAVE

stores

and

Monitor

executes

functions.

string

of monitor

commands

date

names

text

from
of

device

directory

files

stored

screen

executes

binary

during

program

execution

programs

storage device

suftwo characters of the command must be typed (R is
RUN
for
the
ficient
command).
Any additional characters up to the
RETURN
All commands must be followed by the
first blank are ignored.
key before execution will begin.

Only the first

2-4

THE

MONITOR

BATCH
2.2.1

BATCH

sequentially executes a string of Monitor commands.
command file associated with a Monitor command is comCertain system
pleted, another Monitor command is executed.
programs
started
by the RUN command may either terminate BATCH or will not acthese require operator interaction.
cept input from the batch stream;

BATCH

soon

The

form
BA

command
as

the

BATCH

command

is:

cmndfl

where:
is

cmndfl

the

name

taining
Following

example

assigned

list of Monitor

0090
0100

RUN

0110
0120
0130
0140
0150
0160

RUN

DFU, SYSTAB

RUN

JOBl
JOBZ

command

previously

stored

file

file:

COMP,JOB1

SAVE

RUN

JOBl

SORT, SRCL
DFU,OLDTAB

RUN
RUN

JOBl/B

All batch command files must be on the system device.
A batch
file should contain a BATCH command only as its last line.
A

Monitor

con—

commands.

command

and
executed.
batch can then

read

Type
be

from

CTRL/C

restarted

file is
terminate

batch
to

only

the

command

on
the
screen
batch command file;
the
of
the
file.
beginning

displayed
a

turns

the necessary programs and data files must be available
during
If
execution.
an error
occurs, BATCH terminates, control re—
to the Monitor, and a dot is displayed on the screen.

After

the

All

BATCH

restarted
When
tor

is corrected, the entire batch
command
each remaining command can be individually

error
or

the batch command file is finished, control
and a dot is displayed on the screen.

returns

file

can

typed.
to

the

THE MONITOR

Moni-

2-5

DATE
2.2.2

The

DATE

command

DATE

are

created

same

until

The

form
DA

stores

date

reports

new

DATE

command

the

DATE

command

which is assigned to all programs
that
that are printed.
This date remains the
is issued or the system is rebooted.

is:

dd-mmm-yy

where:
dd

mmm

is a three—character alphabetic string
the first three letters of the month.

system is booted,

COS MONITOR V
DATE?

number

two—digit decimal
digits of the year.

the

After

number

two-digit decimal

anything

8.00

(or

the

Monitor

current

typed before the date

entered

representing

version

which

representing

displays

the

day.
must

last

two

message:

number)

entered,

the

Monitor

the

Monitor

repeats:

DATE?
If

the

date

BAD
Enter

the

date

whenever

Examples:
25-SEP-76

'DA

'DATE

THE

displays:

DATE

change the system date.

2-6

incorrectly,

5-JUL-77

MONITOR

the

Monitor

booted.

also

used

DELETE
2.2.3

DELETE

The DELETE command erases
from the specified device

The

form of
DE

the

command

DELETE

named

source,

binary,

system

program

directory.
is:

pronam[,dev1/x

where:

pronam

the

name

the

program

removed

from

di—

the

rectory.
is the
device

dev

three—character
for
the
designation
where
the
If no
program is stored.
specified, the system device is assumed.

physical
device

two—character
be
deleted is

code
that
the
indicating
either a source (S), binary
This code is necessary to
(B), or system (SV) program.
differentiate between three programs with the same name
but of different types.
The code
SV
is
used
rather
than V to make it more difficult to mistakenly delete a
Is

one-

program

system program.
Data

files

are

not

deleted,

they

can

only

replaced.

Examples:
RX3/B

.DE

JOBl,

.DE

PROGA,DK3/S

.DE

INV/S

.DE

FILEX/SV

;Delete binary program named JOBl from device
;RX3.
from
source
named
PROGA
;Delete
program
;device DK3.
;Delete source program named INV from
system
*;device.
FILEX
named
from
;Delete
system
program
;system device.

THE

MONITOR

2-7

DI RECTO RY
2.2.§

DIRECTORY

The DIRECTORY command prints a list of programs stored on
a
device or the name of the data file stored on a logical unit.
the printer is on-line before issuing the DI command.
The

form

the

DIRECTORY

command

physical
Be

sure

is:

[ deVJI/T]
DI

/logical unit #
where:
dev

is a three-character designation
on
which
device
the directory

is an optional switch which
the screen.
on
displayed
directory will be listed on

preceded by a comma or space.
system device is assumed.

for

causes

the

mass

stored,

and

storage
must

not

specified,

the

directory to
specified,

be
the

If /T is not
the printer.

/logical unit #
is

with
number (1-15) of the logical unit assigned
A logical unit # must be pre—
(Data File Utility).
ceded by /.
Specifying a logical unit # causes a label
the

DFU
to

repeated
directory contains

The

length
programs,
was stored.

(LN)

on
listed
each time

the

current

the
a

The DI command must be
printer.
logical unit # is to be printed.

date,

of
of programs,
types
and the date each program

names

512-byte blocks,

A logical unit label contains the file name,
number
a
(if
sequence
multivolume
file), the date the file was created, file length in segfile
stored
was
ments, and the number of the logical unit where the
when
the
label
was requested.
are
sixteen
blocks
Segments
512—byte

long.
The

the
curonly directory entry dates that are valid are those for
year and seven years preceding the current date.
Any dates prior
this time will be printed incorrectly.

rent
to

2-8

THE

MONITOR

Examples:
The command:
.DI
causes

DKO

;Directory

directory

from

similar

physical device

DKO.

the

following

the

MONITOR

2-9

output

printer:
l5-FEB-72

DIRECTORY
NAME

TYPE

DATE

COMP

19-JAN-78

(0006
TSTZ
<0007
TST4
GLOP
<0579
The

10
lS-FEB-78
FREE BLOCKS)
S
07
lZ-FEB-78
FREE BLOCKS>
lS-FEB-78
S
07
10
l5-FEB-78
S
FREE BLOCKS)
S

command:

.DI/3
outputs

;Directory
file

label

from

similar

logical unit 3.
the

one

below.

****************************
*

*
*

NAME

SEQ.

DATE

#01

18—Nov—75

*
*

DEP

*
*
*

LENGTH:

0046

UNIT:

* ************************** *

THE

PLEASE
2.2.5

PLEASE

The

PLEASE command displays
batch command file.

The

form of

the

PLEASE

text

sounded.

To
AND

make a
and

operator

command

PLEASE

displayed exactly

ing CTRL/C)

text

the

during execution

screen

is:

requested by the
continue

the

batch

entered

and

PLEASE

text

terminal

the
and

type any key

alarm

(includ-

program.

two—line PLEASE command, the first
the second line begun with another
know more text is to follow.

line

PLEASE.

terminated
with
The AND lets the

Example:
0020
0030
0040
0050
0060

RUN

JOBl

PLEASE

PUT

PLEASE

TYPE

RUN

INVOICES IN PRINTER AND
3 TO THE NEXT MOUNT MESSAGE

JOB3

PLEASE

PUT

REGULAR

PAPER

PRINTER

file is executed, JOBl will be
the
run,
be displayed, and the terminal alarm will
to
The system waits for a key to be typed in
be sounded.
reply
When
the
PLEASE text, then it displays the next PLEASE command.
the
is
executed
and
a
key is typed in reply to the text, JOB3
Control returns to the Monitor
text
is displayed.
last
PLEASE
when a key is typed in reply to the last PLEASE text.
this

When

first

PLEASE

sounds

2-10

and

THE

batch

PLEASE

command

text

will

command is given in
the system waits for

MONITOR

non-BATCH

RETURN

key

mode,
to

the

terminal

typed.

alarm

RUN
2.2.6

The

RUN

command

loads

and

executes

file.

using the

named
system programs, such
gram

This

system program

command

provides

access

binary
to

proother

all

as:

RUN

SYSGEN

build

RUN

SORT

sort

data

RUN

PIP

move

information

RUN

COMP

compile

new

system

change system handlers.

files.

user

between

source

physical devices.

program

into

binary

program.

The

RUN

command

the

has

form:

pronam
RUN

][,filnaml...,filnam7][/xx]
chain0+chainl...+chain7

where:
pronam

the

name

the

loads
and
program name is omitted, the Monitor
the DIBOL program in the binary scratch area.

the

program

run.

executes

chain0+chainl...
are

binary files

which
For

has

been

which are part of
one
large
program
divided into several chained programs.

example:
.RUN

CHAINO+CHAIN1+CHAIN2+CHAIN3

would execute program CHAINO.
CHAINO would then deter—
mine whether program CHAINl, CHAINZ, or CHAIN3 would be
run

next.

THE MONITOR

2-11

filnaml...,fi1nam7
files which must be on
the
device.
system
of the system programs is executed via the RUN
command and no source files are specified as input, the
file
in
the edit buffer is used as input (system proare

source

one

grams
The

only).

maximum number of binary and source files per
pro—
is
eight (including pronam or chainO).
Multiple
are concatenated and passed to system programs as
large file.

gram
files
one

is one or a combination of option
with the program being run.

/xx
If

the

sage

file

program

specified is

not

found,

the

aSSOCiated

switches

following

error

mes-

displayed.

FILE

NOT

FOUND

stores

editing

scratch area
are returned

the
loaded into memory by a
RUN
command,
contents
of
the
the edit buffer in the
the system device.
The contents of
the
edit
memory when program execution is complete.

Monitor

temporarily

compiled

DIBOL

When

program

buffer

Examples:
most

7Executes

.RU

recently

;program.
.RU
.RUN
.RUN

2-12

THE

;Runs program called JOBl.

JOBl

COMP,

CHECK

,BINl,BIN2

MONITOR

;Compiles

the

source

program CHECK.

from
the
program
BINl and BIN2 as

;Runs

the

;area

using

scratch
binary
input files.

SAVE
2.2.7

SAVE

This command
and
stores

type

The

form

copies
it

the

SAVE

the binary program from the
binary scratch
the
named
device.
The saved binary will

area

is:

command

pronam[,dev][/Y]

where:
pronam

is the name
stored.

dev

is the three-character designation for
has a directory.
If no
device
which
the system device is assumed.
is

used

cate

the

Monitor

program

name

bypass
is

mode

name

specified

assigned

the

REPLACE?

‘encountered.

bypass operator
is

name

the

binary

being

program

any

mass

device

message when

storage

given,
dupli-

Normally used in

batch

response.

already in the directory,

the

displays:

REPLACE?

Type

any other

YES

replace the

old

leave

the

character

file with the new file.
N
or
Type
file and return to the Monitor.

old

THE

MONITOR

2-13

EDITOR COMMANDS

2.3

COS-310 Monitor contains a line number editor.
input to the Monitor is assigned a line number.

The

Every line of text

Example:
0100

START

0110
0120
0130
0140
0150
0160
0170
0180
0190
0200

RECORD A

LOOP,

EOF,

PROC

INIT
XMIT

(2,IN,'MINT')
(2,A,EOF)
(8,A)

LOOP

XMIT

FINI(2)
STOP
END

Insertions,
The

A64

A1,

changes,

following

and

commands

deletions

are

done

are

functions

the

clears

FETCH

loads

LIST

outputs

text

outputs

incremented

Line

Number

Commands

edits

text
a

file

source

text

the

within

RESEQUENCE

renumbers program

WRITE

stores

source

these

line

numbers.

editor.
edit

the

from

ERASE

with

buffer

into memory
screen

line

the

printer

numbers

edit

buffer

lines

files

for

later

editing

commands can be entered in response to the
Monitor
dot.
Only
The exceptions to
the first two characters of the command are needed.
this first-two-letter convention are in the
line
number
and
number
commands.
All commands must be followed by the RETURN key.

These

2-14

THE

MONITOR

ERASE
2.3.1

ERASE

The

ERASE

The

form

command
of

the

erases

ERASE

(clears)

text

from

the

edit buffer.

is:

command

ER [nl][,n2]
where:

the

number

the

line

erased

the

first

line numbers which delimit the lines to be erased.
two
If omitted, erasing starts at the beginning of the edit
buffer.
is

,n2

the

second

the

two

delimiting line

indicates where

If n2
erasing ends.
is included, erasing continues
comma
edit buffer.

omitted

but

it
the

the

numbers;
end

line numbers are specified, the ERASE command clears the
buffer.
Use this command to erase the edit buffer before
any material to be edited.

edit

ing

entire
enter-

Examples:
:Clears the entire edit buffer.

.ER
.ER

;Clears line 5.

.ER

;Clears

.ER

5,10

:Clears from line

.ER

;Clears

from

the

line

start

the

buffer

through line 10.

through the

end

through line 5.

the

buffer.

THE MONITOR

2-15

FETCH
2.3.2

FETCH

The FETCH command erases the edit buffer and
file from the specified device into memory.
The

form

the

FETCH

command

the

named

source

file

loads

source

is:

filnam[,dev]

where:
filnam

the name of a previously
be brought into memory.

the

source

FILE

NOT

file

not

found,

the

designation
is

stored.

Monitor

displays

the

message:

FOUND

Retype the command with the correct
nation.

which

for the mass storage
If the device desigsystem device is assumed.

is the three-character
where the file
device
nation-is omitted, the

dev

stored

Consult

the

directory

file

source

find

the

name

proper

device

desig-

name.

Examples:
.FE

RICH

;Moves

;edit

2-16

file RICH
buffer.

from

the

.FE

PAYROL,DK2 ;Moves file PAYROL from
;the edit buffer.

THE

MONITOR

system device

RK05

disk

the

drive

LIST
2.3.3

LIST

The
the

LIST

The

form

command outputs the specified lines or the
edit buffer to the printer or to the screen.
of

the

LIST

command

entire

contents

is:

[n1][.n2][/L]

where:
is

the number of the line to be output or the first
of
line numbers which delimit the lines to be output.
If omitted, output starts at the beginning of the
edit
buffer.

two

is the second of two line numbers;
it indicates
where
If n2 is omitted but the comma is includoutput ends.
ed, output continues to the end of the edit buffer.

,n2
'

is the one-letter switch which will output
the
If /L is not indicated, the
printer.
played on the screen.

the list
to
list is dis-

If no line numbers are specified, the
entire
contents
of
the
edit
buffer
is
CTRL/O
output.
CTRL/S
stops output from an LI command;
halts display on the screen;
CTRL/Q resumes display halted by CTRL/S.

Examples:
.LI/L

;List entire edit buffer

.LI

;Display

line

.LI

;Display

from

beginning

.LI

5,10

;Display line 5-10,

.LI

;Display

from

line

the

printer.

screen.

buffer

inclusive,
5

through line
the

through the end

screen.

the

THE

buffer.

MONITOR

2—17

LINE NUMBER
Line Number

2.3.4

Line Number command automatically outputs incremented line numbers
lines can be entered without manually typing each line number.

The
so

new

.The

form of
LN

the

Line Number

is:

command

[n][,inc]

where:

is the number of the starting
line number is specified, 100

line.
is

If
assumed.

starting

increincre—

the
the comma after the starting number and
number are omitted, the starting number and
ment number are the same.
If

ment

and

last LN
to 10.

the command is LN 100, the start line number
the
increment
remains unchanged from the
Once in memory, the increment returns
command.
is
is

inc

the

increment
10

specified,

between

line

numbers.

100

increment

assumed.

been
Line Number command is terminated and some editing has
done,
Line
the
Number
command (LN) with no arguments to display the
type

The
are

number

sequence.

Line Numbers
command does not clear the edit buffer.
available.
Under the default conditions (start at 100,
10), the program can be approximately 400 lines long.
LN

The

maximum

number

number
and
space,
two characters.
No

terminal

the
the

screens

2-18

are

Monitor executes
next line number.

120

THE

MONITOR

input line,
number

characters wide.

carriage return/line
If

the Monitor gives
input line is lost.

ceeded,
tire

characters on an
is 120.
The line

the
the

lZO—character
error

message

and

including
space

are

to 4095
increment

the

line

counted

When the screen is full,
feed but does not display
is
ex—
input line length
LINE

TOO

LONG

and

the

en—

RETURN

line

number

blank
line

line,

RETURN

key.

Tabs

key

after

blank

the

used

most

goes
five

an
automatic line
the
number,
To obtain a
line is not generated.
To obtain a
blank
type the SPACE bar and the RETURN key.
you manually enter a line number, type two spaces and the

key typed after

but

to increase
terminals is set

can

the first
increments

column

because

the

readability of
produce up to 8

line

number

and

TAB
The
program.
The first tab
spaces.
take
the
first
space
a

spaces.

Type CTRL/Z
line

indicate

end

the

input

and

the

halt

automatic

numbering.

Examples:
;Requests line numbers starting
;of 10.

.LN

100

with

increments

with

increments

.LN

10,5

;Requests
;of 5.

line

numbers

starting

.LN

,100

;Requests

line

numbers

starting

100

;Requests line numbers starting
;of 50.

(default)

with

;increments of 100.
.LN

with

increments

DELETE
using automatic line numbers, use the
The
DELETE
erases
the
RETURN
CTRL/U prior
key
typing
key.
key
the Monitor
the last character typed.
CTRL/U erases the entire line;
redisplays the line number.

error

made

the

pears,

when
to

edit buffer is full, the error message
and the last line entered is lost.

The edit buffer can be separated into
is done with the following procedure:
WRITE

the

edit

buffer

ERASE

the

last

half

WRITE

the

edit

buffer

FETCH

file B.

ERASE

the

first

half

WRITE

the

edit

buffer

file

the
as

of
as

the

source

FULL

ap-

files.

This

MONITOR

2-19

buffer.

edit

file

BUFFER

edit

file

two

EDIT

buffer.

THE

NUMBER COMMANDS
2 3
.

Number Commands

Any line beginning with
Lines

are

edited

nnnn

[text]

number

can

using the following

edited

the

work

edit

buffer.

form:

where:
nnnn

text

the

data

number
to

arated

If text is
Lines
are
number and
line.

already

RETURN

that

stored

right

line

you

want

from

becomes

TAB

on.

The data
input on the line.
the line number by one SPACE
the first character of text.

line

must

TAB.

the
new
text
replaces
line
number
order.
increasing
Type the
after the line number to clear data from

input line is limited to
line number (a total of 120

116

number,

characters

plus

the

before

editing:

.LI

0035

PROC

0040

INIT(I,V,IN)

0047

XMIT(6,B)

ooéo

END

Editing

commands:

.35
.40
.47
Text

after

PROC

INIT(1,IN,'LABEL',2)

editing:

.LI

2-20

THE

0035

PROC

0040

INIT(l,IN,'LABEL',2)

0060

END

MONITOR

it.
line
that

four-character

characters).

Examples:
Text

sep-

;Inserts PROCl at line 35.
;Inserts new text at line 40.
;Erases text and line number.

RESEQUENCE
2.3.6

RESEQUENCE

The

RESEQUENCE command renumbers
tion and deletion of lines.

The

form
RE

the

RESEQUENCE

the

command

program

lines

for

addi-

starting

line

adjust

is:

[n][,inc]

where:

is the
number

line

starting
is

specified,

number.
If
100 is assumed.

the comma after the starting number and
the
increnumber are omitted, the starting number and increIf the
is
ment number are the same.
comma
included,
the
starting number is as designated and the increment
remains unchanged unless the Monitor is read back
into
in memory, the increment returns to 10.
once
memory;
If

ment

is
is

inc

the

error

line

number

message

mand with

the

LINE

smaller

increment
10

between

specified,
exceeds

4095

# TOO LARGE
increments.

only partially resequenced

and

line

numbers.

increment

assumed.

the
command,
following a RESEQUENCE
results.
Enter another RESEQUENCE comIf this is not done, the text
will
be
duplicate line numbers may result.

Examples:
in
a
the
edit
;Resequences line numbers of
program
100
as
the
line
number
and
10
;buffer
using
starting

.RE

;as

the

increment.

.RE

10,5

a
in
the
;Resequences line numbers of
program
10 as the starting line number and
;buffer
using
;the increment.

.RE

,100

in
the
edit
;Resequences line numbers of the program
;buffer
using 100 or the last specified line number as
;the starting line and 100 as the increment.

.RE

50,

;Resequences line numbers of
the
increment.

;using
;the

starting line

edit
5 as

edit
buffer
program in
number without changing

THE

MONITOR

2-21

WRITE
2.3.7

WRITE

The WRITE
can

later

The

form
WR

command stores
be compiled or
of

the WRITE

source

fetched

file
for

the

specified device

editing.

is:

command

filnam[,dev][/Y]

where:

filnam

the

name

stored.

(up

six

characters)

the

source

file

,dev

is the three—character designation for the mass storage
device where the program is to be stored.
If no device
is specified, the system device is assumed.

bypasses the

message when a duplicate name is
used in a batch file to bypass
Normally

REPLACE?

encountered.

operator
If

the

filnam

specified

response.

duplicate

name,

the

Monitor

displays:

REPLACE?

Type

YES

replace the old file with

any other

character

2-22

MONITOR

THE

leave

the

old

file

N
the new file.
or
Type
and return to the Monitor.

2.4

MONITOR ERROR MESSAGES

Explanation

Message

BAD

COMPILATION

Attempted
had

errors.

SAVE

compiled binary that

Correct

errors

before

com—

piling.
BAD

DATE

Typed

BAD

DIRECTORY

Attempted

FULL

than 8,150 characters
2.3.4 Line Number).

Greater

tion
IN

ERROR ON

device

COMMAND

deV,

RETRY?

Miscellaneous.
Check
for form and accuracy.
The

wrong

for

The

file

device

was

NOT

FOUND

command

designated.

Type

retry.

directory

specified
that

file name or
existence.
ILLEGAL

PROGRAM

was

not

found

specified.
review directory
was

Sec-

(see

Any other input
the device handler to retry.
FILE

BUFFER

ERROR

Retype.

data file label, or label's
form
Check for correct label.
incorrect.

LABEL

EDIT

date.

unrecognizable

file
reference or store
a
with a damaged or nonexistent directory.
diwith
Only devices
rectories can be used.
If the directory
is damaged, call your Software
Specialist.

BAD

causes

the

Re-enter

for

file

that
to run a system
program
different version number than the
be
the
Monitor.
Version numbers
must

Attempted
has

same.

ILLEGAL

UNIT

Either the specified logical unit number
is
(not 1—15) or the specified
illegal
device is not currently part of the sys—
tem.
Replace the illegal number with a
a
corcorrect unit number.
Stipulate

device designation.

rect
IN

USE

The

specified logical

open.

Select

another

is
unit
already
logical unit.

THE

MONITOR

2-23

Explanation

Message
More

LONG

TOO

LINE

than

120

input line.
Line

# TOO LARGE

LINE

on
characters entered
Line must be shortened.

number
greater
line
numbers
number of lines.

Resequence
total
?NO

FILE

SAVE

Nothing
command
tered.

in
is

than
4095.
reduce the

edit
buffer
when
issued.
New data must

the

WRITE
be en-

to read or write on
a
that was not opened by the system
Device must be opened with
an
program.

INIT

Program attempted

device
INIT
NO

statement.

enough memory to support the selectprinter
(e.g., LQP printer requires
24K bytes of memory).
Add
more
memory
or
select another type of printer.
Not

BUFFER

2.5

RUN-TIME

ERROR MESSAGES

All errors are fatal unless the error is trapable and the statement in
it occurs is immediately preceded by an ON ERROR statement with
which
a
valid label (see Section 1.2.13 ON ERROR).

LINE

the

COMP/O

was

asterisk

(*)

displayed

2-24

CHAIN

CHAIN
mand.

argument does not match

.RUN

chained programs must
the RUN command.

com—

stip-

character other than +, -,
or
space,
the digits 0-9 was encountered in an alCheck
phanumeric-to-numeric conversion.
and delete bad digits.

DIGIT

THE

Explanation

All
ulated in

BAD

cannot

source

Message

*BAD

with

nnnn
under all run-time error messages;
line number where the error occurred.
program
specified for a program, nnnn is meaningless.

checked

nnnn

DIBOL

with

messages marked
ERROR statement.

The

MONITOR

Explanation

Message

run a binary program
which
Check
compilation error.
for
errors.
Correct
compilation listing
errors and recompile.

*BAD PROGRAM

*DIBOL

FILE

NUMBER

USE

Attempted

contains

channel
*DIBOL

FILE

NUMBER NOT

INITED

number
is
already
Enter new
device.
number/device combination.

In INIT, the channel
with
associated
a

was made to
or
READ,
XMIT,
with a channel number that was not
associated with a device.
Either
INIT
or
the
channel
number
use
a channel
number already opened.

attempt

WRITE

END

file
has
The last record of
an
input
been
and the end—of-file mark en—
read
was
countered, but no EOF label
speci—
in the XMIT statement or in the ON
fied
ERROR
XMIT
statement
the
preceding

FILE

Rewrite

statement.

*ILLEGAL

DEVICE

XMIT

Attempted to WRITE on a
for
not
UPDATE
opened

statement.

file

that

was

attempted to
READ from a file that was not opened for
INPUT or UPDATE.
INIT file properly.

ILLEGAL

RECORD

*ILLEGAL SUBSTRING

Either the record number is 0, past
the
of the logical unit, or the records
end
are not all
the same length when you are
using UPDATE mode.
A

Procedure

DIBOL

tempted

field,
Redefine
LINE

TOO LONG

LEFT

Attempted
for
long

Not

Division

access

m<l

XMIT a record that
in
the
area defined
Redefine the area in

enough

buffers

statement

subscripted

Fl
but
(m,n),
data field.

Division.
Division.
*NO BUFFERS

(e.

memory
.,

available

DIBOL

program

is
the
the

for
is

at—

data
m>n.

too
Data
Data

I/O
too

buffer of some multiple of
512 characters is set up for each active
Another possibility:
mass storage file.
too few files were specified in the PROC
statement.
Specify more files.

big).

THE

MONITOR

2-25

Message
NO

Explanation

FILE

file

specified

satisfy

INIT

(SYS)

command

RUN

Specify

statement

file.
NUMBER

TOO

LONG

numeric

was

used

within
*PROGRAM TOO BIG

field longer
than
in
a calculation.

15
digits
Reduce to

lS-digit limitation.

program does not fit in available
Reduce
memory.
program size, or chain

Binary

program.
*PUSHDOWN OVERFLOW

is too complex and/or
subrou—
tines are nested to a depth greater than
50.
Simplify statement, reduce nesting,
or both.

*RETURN WITHOUT

The

CALL

Statement

but

*SUBSCRIPT TOO

BIG

program tried to execute
there was no place to go.

CALL

TURN

statement.

TRAP

statement

Program attempted

RETURN,

Implement

delete

use

the

RE-

subscript

that
defined
in the Data
than
Note that the run—time system
Division.
does
not detect all illegal subscripts,
which would cause the program
those
only
or
the system to be destroyed.
Redefine

larger

subscript.
ZERO

DIVISOR

The

program attempted
division by

Eliminate

2-26

THE

MONITOR

divide

zero.

CHAPTER
SYSTEM GENERATION

PROGRAM

(SYSGEN)

is
a
conversational
System Generation Program (SYSGEN)
program
on
or
to
create
a
a
new device
to change the system
system
followThe SYSGEN statement has the
handlers in the current system.
The

used

form:

ing

/B
RUN

SYSGEN

/C
where:
builds

/B
/C

SYSGEN/B

3.1

SYSGEN/B

Use

system in

handlers

changes

OPERATING

build

drives must

system
be

least

perform this operation.
RUN

After

command,
IS

THE

you
then

appears

build
on

SYSGEN
SYSTEM

NEW

Respond by typing
want

device.
current

system.

new

running

and

device.
loaded

SYSGEN/B,

execute

the

system in

order

type:

SYSGEN/B

this
WHAT

new

the

PROCEDURES

two

the
a

the

displays

the

DEVICE?

three-character

new

system

screen.

following question:

on.

designation

the

message

for
similar

that
device
the following

ENTER NUMBER

CORRESPONDING
RK05

CARTRIDGE

RXOl

FLOPPY

DISK DRIVES

RX02

FLOPPY

DISK

RK05

AND

RXOl

DISK DRIVES

RK05

AND

RX02

DISK

TYPE

NUMBER

PRINTER

DRIVES

kind

MODEL

DECPRINTER

LA35

DECWRITER

LA36RO

DECWRITER

LQP

LETTER-QUALITY PRINTER

LP05

300

LA8

DECPRINTER

LA120

DECWRITER

III

NONE

the

LPM

lines.

After

WANT

YOU
YES

every time you

PER

DKC8-AA

the

SYSTEM GENERATION

INTERFACE

If
you want.
SYSGEN asks:

you

select

PAGE?

START-UP

use

want.

PRINTER

want

lines-per-page

you want

you

SYSTEM

number corresponding to the printer
that does not have forms hardware,
LINES

that

PRINTER

Type the number of lines you

Answer

USING

drive(s)

LA8A

HOW MANY

3-2

the

DRIVES

DISK

printer

CONFIGURATION

PLEASE

Type

DESIRED

Type the number corresponding
SYSGEN responds with:

BATCH

has

is
each page.
The default value
been specified, the system asks:

FILE?

the Monitor to execute
Monitor
DATE command.

PROGRAM

(SYSGEN)

the

file

batch

Answer

you

START

not

not
This
execute the batch file.
option does
additional memory for the COS-310 Monitor or space on the
START
You
the
file.
system device except for the space needed for
create START by writing a batch file and naming it START.

automatically

want

require

After

any

enter

YES

YOU WANT

you
DO

Answer

YES

files

onto

previously

TRANSFER

new

stored

YOUR

responds by asking:
FILES?

and
the
and
source,
binary
system,
This transfer destroys anything
system device.
the
the new system device.
Answer NO
to
empty

the Monitor

copy
the

SYSGEN

NO,

and to copy
device's
directory
no
files are transferred.
device;
new

SYSGEN

then

YES

Type

your

The new system
last question.

you

make

chose

area

unit

cal

not

transfer

SYSGEN/B does
new

displayed.
the

Monitor

onto

the

new

CORRECT?

not

are

answers

questions starting

ately

COS-310

asks:

EVERYTHING

the

built

correct.

request

only

for

after

you

Type
the

new

give

and

SYSGEN

repeats

the

system device.
YES

response

SYSGEN's

transfer files, the COS MONITOR message is immediIf you chose to transfer files, the time needed to
delays the COS MONITOR message.

the logical
the system on

reset

occupied by
assignments.

unit assignments
a disk.
Use DFU

to
to

the
reflect
make new logi-

will fail if you attempt to transfer your files
device that does not have enough room for both the system and the
files.
The operation can be done by rebooting the system and
running
without
SYSGEN/B
transferring files onto one device and then running
SYSGEN/B without transferring files a second time onto another device.
Then use PIP OPT- E to put source files on one device and binary files
on the other device.
The
to

3.2

SYSGEN/B operation

SYSGEN/C

OPERATING

PROCEDURES

Use SYSGEN/C to change handlers within the
SYSGEN/C, type:

RUN

current

system.

execute

SYSGEN/C

SYSTEM GENERATION PROGRAM

(SYSGEN)

3-3

SYSGEN

ENTER

Type

NUMBER

CONFIGURATION

DESIRED

CORRESPONDING

RK05

CARTRIDGE

RXOl

FLOPPY

DISK

DRIVES

RXOZ

FLOPPY

DISK

DRIVES

RK05

AND

RXOl

DISK

DRIVES

RK05 AND

RX02

DISK

DRIVES

the

number corresponding
responds with:
TYPE

NUMBER

DISK

the

PRINTER

DRIVES

kind

MODEL

LA8A

DECPRINTER

LA35

DECWRITER

LA36RO

DECWRITER

LQP

LETTER-QUALITY PRINTER

LP05

300

LA8

DECPRINTER

LAlZO

DECWRITER

III

NONE

the

printer

Type

statement:

PLEASE

Type

following

SYSGEN

the

displays

LPM

USING

that

you

want.

SYSTEM

DKC8-AA

INTERFACE

PRINTER

number corresponding to the printer
that does not have forms hardware,

you

If
asks:

want.

SYSGEN

you

select

PAGE?

HOW

MANY

the

number of lines you want on each page.
The default value
is
After lines-per~page has been specified, the system asks:

lines.
DO

YOU

LINES

drive(s)

WANT

PER

START-UP

BATCH

FILE?

Monitor to execute
the
START
batch
file
DATE
Monitor
command.
Answer
NO
if
do
not
every
you
you
want to automatically execute the batch file.
This
not
does
option
require
any additional memory for the COS-310 Monitor or space on the
the
START
You
file.
system device except for the space needed for
create START by writing a batch file and naming it START.
Answer

YES

time

3-4

you

want

use

the

SYSTEM GENERATION

PROGRAM

(SYSGEN)

After

Type
and

you enter
IS

EVERYTHING

and

SYSGEN

are

3.3

the

NO,

SYSGEN

asks:

CORRECT?

entire

sequence

questions begins again.

COMPLETE--PLEASE

RE-INITIALIZE

SYSTEM

system automatically halts and must be rebooted.
in the system and SYSGEN/C is completed.

SYSGEN

The

new

handlers

ERROR MESSAGES

Explanation

SWITCH

Attempted

/C.

Use

dev

MUST

INCLUDED

FULL

use

switch other

than

operate SYSGEN/C without

device
designation where

handler.
needed.

files

Ran

out

room

for

Enter

new

desig-

the

device

device.

SYSGEN/B twice without transferring files
use

PIP

‘device
most

Answer

common

the

CONFIGURATION

Attempted
a
nating

The

YES

now

Message

BAD

Type

responds:

SYSGEN

The

YES

indication of

OPT-

and

error

put

binary files
is

the

files
other

the

source
on

repeat

Run

and
one

device.

question.

question again.

SYSTEM GENERATION PROGRAM

(SYSGEN)

3-5

CHAPTER
DATA

FILE

UTILITY

PROGRAM

(DFU)

unit
assignUtility Program (DFU) to make logical
The
a
table of these assignments for reference.
print
COS—310 system is shipped with logical units unassigned.
Use

the

ments

Data

File

4.1

DFU

execute

OPERATING

DFU,

PROCEDURES

type

,filnam
RUN

DFU

/xx
where:

,filnam

/xx

is the name of a previously created
table of logical unit assignments.
on the
system device.
is

option switch

tion of

/DL

which determines

the

containing
file

stored

specific

func-

table

creat—

DFU.

makes
ed

file
This

logical unit assignments
the

edit

from

buffer.

makes new logical
the keyboard.

unit

assignments

displays

the

table

ments

the

screen.

lists

the

ments

table of current
the printer.

current

directly

from

logical unit assign—

logical

unit

assign-

displays an expanded table of current logical unit
Similar to /D with the addition of
assignments.

file name, volume
number,
sequence
date, and length of the data file.
the

/EL

neither

/B.

4.1.1

the
on

name

nor

file

expanded table
the

logical

unit

assign—

DFU

defaults

printer.

option switch is specified,

DFU,filnam Operating Procedures

DFU,filnam
file

lists
ments

creation

the

takes

the

logical unit assignments from a table
To execute DFU,filnam type:

stored

system device.

DFU,filnam

RUN

is created with editor commands and contains the device
deand
the
number of segments in each logical unit.
The selogi—
quence of the entries determines the number associated with the
cal
is created in the edit buffer and stored as a
unit.
The
table
named file.
The table is similar to the following:
The

table

signation

Rxl,
RKl,
RK3,

41
41
41
21

A maximum

RXO,

The

DFU/B
To

entries

program makes

DFU

produces

4.1.2

output

can

the
the

be made

the

table.

assignments on the appropriate
or printer.

devices

but

screen

DFU/B Operating Procedures
makes

execute
RUN

logical unit assignments
DFU/B, type:

from

table

the

edit

buffer.

DFU/B

The table
be in the

is the same as the one used by DFU,filnam.
The
table
must
edit buffer.
The processor makes the assignments on the ap—

propriate

devices

4-2

DATA FILE

but

produces

UTILITY PROGRAM

output

(DFU)

the

screen

printer.

4.1.3

DFU/K Operating Procedures

DFU/K makes new logical unit assignments
cute DFU/K, type:

For

the

keyboard.

exe-

DFU/K

RUN

DFU

from

responds by prompting
example:

you

enter

the

unit

logical

assignments.

,RUN DFU/K
1
2
3

=
=

4.1.4

8.00

DFU

RXO,4l
RXl,4l
RX2,41
RX3,41
END

DFU/D Operating Procedures

DFU/D displays
To

screen.

table

DFU/D,

current

logical unit

assignments

the

type:

DFU/D

RUN
A

the

execute

similar

UNIT

the

DEV.

SEGS.

RXO
RXl
RXZ
RX3

4l
41
41
41

following

displayed

the

screen.

-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-

-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-

DATA

FILE

UTILITY

PROGRAM

(DFU)

4-3

where:
UNIT

DEV.

is the three-character designation of
device where the unit is located.

the

mass

storage

SEGS.

is the
unit.

each

logical

number

assigned

segments

DFU/DL Operating Procedures

4.1.5

DFU/DL lists
table

same

execute

table

table of
in DFU/D

DFU/DL,

current

This

logical unit assignments.

except the table

listed

the

printer.

type:

DFU/DL

RUN
A

logical unit number.

the

similar

UNIT

the

DEV.

SEGS.

RXO

41
41
41
41

RXl
RXZ

RX3

following

listed

the

printer.

-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-

-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-

-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-

-UNDEFINED-UNDEFINED-

where:

4-4

UNIT

DEV.

is the three-character designation of
device where the unit is located.

the

mass

storage

SEGS.

is the
unit.

number

each

logical

UTILITY

PROGRAM

DATA

FILE

the

unit

logical

number.

segments

(DFU)

assigned

DFU/E Operating Procedures

4.1.6

DFU/E displays the expanded table of current logical unit assignments.
with
the addition of the file name, the
to
This
is
similar
DFU/D
volume sequence number (1-63), the creation date, and the data length.
To execute DFU/E, type:

DFU/E

RUN
A

similar

table

the

following

displayed

the

UNIT

DEV.

SEGS.

NAME

SEQ.

DATE

LEN.

RXl
RXl
RXl

0037
0002
0002

FILEl
FILEZ
FILE3

l
1

2/ 4/76
1/28/76
3/ 1/76

0010
0002

2
3
4

5
6
7

8
9
10
ll
12

l3
l4
15

—

UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED

UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED

UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED

screen.

0002

—

where:
UNIT

DEV.

is the three-character designation of
device where the unit is located.

the

mass

storage

SEGS.

is the
unit.

number

each

logical

NAME

the

name

the

SEQ.

the

file)

When

logical unit

segments

assigned

the

data

file.

the

data

the

creation date

LEN.

the

number

assigned

sequence number
of that specific

DATE

using DFU/E

number.

DFU/EL,

file.

(what volume

multivolume

file.

segments used by the data file.

failure

mount

each

where logical units are assigned will either cause
will cause the system to stop processing until the
is mounted.

DATA FILE

storage

mass
an

error

mass

device

message

storage device

UTILITY PROGRAM

(DFU)

4-5

DFU/EL Operating Procedures

4.1.7

DFU/EL lists the expanded table of current logical
is
the same as DFU/E except the table is listed
To execute DFU/EL, type:

printer.

table

the

mass

storage

each

logical

DFU/EL

RUN
A

assignments.
the

This

similar

UNIT

following is listed

the

DEV.

SEGS.

NAME

Rxl

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ll
12
l3
l4
l5

Rxl
Rxl

0037
0002
0002

UNDEFINED

UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED

UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED
UNDEFINED

the

printer.

SEQ.

DATE

LEN.

FILEl

1
1

2/ 4/76
1/28/76
3/ 1/76

0010

FILE2
FILE3

0002
0002

where:
UNIT

DEV.

is the three—character designation
device where the unit is located.

SEGS.

is the
unit.

number

NAME

the

name

the

SEQ.

the

file)

The
one

4-6

unit

logical

assigned

the

file.

data

sequence number
of that specific

data

file.

the

data

the

creation date

LEN.

the

number

PROGRAM

(what volume

multivolume

file.

segments used by the data file.

number of segments in a logical
file in each logical unit.

UTILITY

assigned

segments

DATE

DATA FILE

number.

(DFU)

unit

you.

COS—310

allows

4.2

LOGICAL UNIT ASSIGNMENTS

The

assignment

greater

logical

utilization of

The COS-310

THE

COS-310

SYSTEM

units

mass

storage

characters
256 words
16 blocks
41 segments
61 segments
406 segments

1 segment
Rx01 storage
Rx02 storage
RK05 storage

assign logical units
configuration.

same

capacity
capacity
capacity

devices

not

currently part

the

sys—

Determining Logical Unit Size

4.2.1

The

provides

word
block

not

tem

devices

area.

system handles storage using the following hierarchy:

the

works

following procedure

when

all

records

within

file

are

the

size.

the
and
The size of a logical unit is dependent upon the record size
To determine the number
number
of records required in the data file.
of segments required for a logical unit, use the following steps:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Determine
of

510

odd,

the

data characters in a record
(maximum
If the number
The number must be even.
make it even.

number

characters).
add

one

deter—
number
the total from

the
COS—310 requires two characters to store
mined
in Step 1;
add these two characters to
This new total is the record size.
Step 1.

Determine

the

total
the
desired.

multiplying

records

number
record

characters required in the file
size found in Step 2 by the number

Step 4

for
a
Add 512 characters for a file header and 2 characters
file
trailer.
This plus the total from Step 3 is the total
number of characters to be used in the logical unit.

Step 5

Because

the

than

characters,

8192.

Round

logical unit size
up

any

the

number

is expressed
from Step 4

segments rather
be divided by

must

remainder.

following algorithm can be used to perform this calculation by
signing values to fields DATA and RECS.

The

DATA

FILE

UTILITY

PROGRAM

(DFU)

as-

4-7

RECORD

DATA,
RECS,
FSIZE,
RECORD

;Number of data characters per
;Number of records in file.
;Number of characters in file.

D5
D15

record.

RESULT

'TRUE

A18,

RECORD

SIZE:

RSIZE,

A26,

CHARACTERS

FILE

SIZE:

SIZE,

A9,

SEGMENTS'

PROC

2 +
512

RSIZE
FSIZE

l)/2)*2

RSIZE

SIZE
XMIT

SIZE

(8,

Logical Units

system device,
at

the
would

RESULT)

How

beginning,

4.2.2

the

RECS

FSIZE/8192
(FSIZE.EQ.SIZE*8192)GO

SIZE

((DATA
+

are

Assigned by

logical units

are

which
Unit
2;
Unit

order
assigned in a pushdown
example, a disk with three
from
the
as:
beginning,

For
end of the device.
be arranged,
starting

logical units
Monitor;
Directory;
to

DFU

User programs;
Unused space
System programs;
Unit
1;
Logical
Logical
programs may be added;
As more logical units are assigned, Logical
Logical Unit 3.
Logical Unit 2, etc., move closer to the beginning of the devnew

user

ice.

order
logical units are assigned in
sequential
4
For
a
disk
with
of
the
device.
beginning
example,
starting
Unit
1;
2;
Logical Unit
Logical
logical units might be arranged:
Unused space.
Logical Unit 4;
Logical Unit 3;
On

nonsystem devices,
at

the

Example:
Logical Unit

Device

DKO
DKO
DKO
DKl
DKl
DKl

2
3
4
5

4-8

DATA

FILE

UTILITY

PROGRAM

Size

(Segments)
5
5
5
2O
21
20

(DFU)

The

preceding logical unit assignments would cause an RK05 system disk
and nonsystem disk (DKl) to be organized as follows:

(DKO)

Non—system Disk

System Disk

DKO

DKl
(I)

LU3

LUZ

E
lit-l

L01

0
'\

UNUSED

SPACE

S
(é:

USER

PROGRAM

(SOURCE
8

BINARIES)

a
z
o

SYSTEM
PROGRAMS

[d
m
\D

M
M

MONITOR

L06
L05

Eng
32

_‘§
0

DIRECTORY

It is advisable to
actual
data
file
wastes

4.3

create

size

LU4

5']:

logical units only slightly larger than
since
a
short file in a large logical

the
unit

storage.

DISK USERS

RK05 disk cartridges each contain 406 segments.
four
RK05
Up to
drives
can
be
mounted on a system.
200
blocks
(or 12
Approximately
must
be
to
left
hold
the
and
segments)
unassigned
operating
system
In
50 segments should be left to store
addition,
system
programs.
The

source

control

344

logical

programs,
segments for

programs, and binary programs.
unit assignments.

This

DATA FILE UTILITY PROGRAM

leaves

(DFU)

4-9

DKO
l

system
programs

406

source

and

344

binary

files

for

segments

logical unit
assignments

sample logical unit assignment might be:
DKO
l

system

62
source

and

binary files
The
for

4.4

area

between

logical unit

system program

DFU

268

free

logical

space

unit

can

and

the

system

unassigned

Explanation
than
Attempted to use an option switch other
Use only allow—
/B, /K, /D, /DL, /E, or /EL.

option switches.

able
DEVICE

device

Enter

INSUFFICIENT

SPACE

ROOM

FOR

than one usable by
the
in
logical
device designation.

correct

the
unit

system
table.

DEVICE
are
allocate more segments than
Either allocate fewer
device.

Attempted

available

segments,

make

use

ENOUGH

other

designated

was

NOT

left

ERROR MESSAGES

SWITCH

ILLEGAL

overflow.

Message

BAD

406

360

314

SYSTEM

AND

segments

available,

larger device.
FILES

was too
small to hold
sys—
PIP OPT- E to put
files.
and
Use
program
system on one device and files on another.

Device

designated

tem

Number
number

# TOO LARGE

SYNTAX

Missing

ERROR

Correct

4-10

DATA

FILE

UTILITY

PROGRAM

entered
smaller

than

commas,
error

(DFU)

larger than

was

and

4095.

Enter

4095.
extra

reenter.

characters,

etc.

CHAPTER

The

Compiler

The

the

printer

5.1

COMP OPERATING

execute
RUN

source

the

for

listing

map

Turn

DIBOL

space
program.

the

Compiler outputs

storage

COMPILER

storage

reserves

used

converts

DIBOL

source

the

before

(COMP)

program

constants,

into

binary

program
compilation
records and fields used

running

the

program

and

variables,

and

statements

and
a
listing
by the program.

Compiler.

PROCEDURES

Compiler

program,

type:

COMP[,filnaml...,filnam7][/xx]

where:

filnaml...,filnam7
are
file(s)
no

/xx

files

are

If
compiled into one binary program.
buffer
in
the
edit
the
program
specified,
be

compiled.

or
is
one
switches:

combination

the

following

option

and

the

stops output of the compilation
storage map listing.

compiles the program and, if no errors are detect—
The
ed, executes the binary program;
implies /N.
message

successfully
the

program,
to
be
tion.

ment

enables

the

listing

displayed

when

INIT

completed.
the

program must have
compiled and executed

compiling
is

SYS
an

END

with

TRACE

function;

implies /G.

the

used

is
in

state—

op—

transfers control

creates

DDT;

implies /G.

binary program that requires less memory
eliminating the TRACE feature and accuExecution speed of the comreporting.
is
increased
as much as 20%.
piled program
by
This option can be combined with /N or /G.
a

space
by
rate error

The

/0 option

saves

Saves

memory space
location

one

follows:

for

each

executable

statement.
0

Saves

one

Uses

one

location for each label.
location
for
ON
each

ERROR

statement.
Use

the

/0 option

thoroughly debugged

programs.

the
command,
/N or /G option is specified in the RUN COMP
Division
and
a
(Data
outputs
two-part
compilation listing
Procedure Division) of the source program and a storage map either
on
the printer or on the device specified in START, PROC, or END.

Unless

the

Compiler

Compiler underscores the number
and inserts a caret (“) pointing to
ed on the storage map.
Errors must
can be executed.
The

The

5.1.1

COS

lZ-JUL-78

DIBOL

0100

START

0110

RECORD

0120
0130
0140
0150
0160
0170
0180
0190
0200
0210

0220
0230
0240
0250

number

the

Other errors are list—
before
the
corrected
program

line

where

error

occurs

error.

errors

ERRORS

Program Compilation Listing

Source

DIVISION

DATA

5-2

the

Compiler displays

WED

;Optional compilation
named INBUF.
;Numeric field named

INBUF

,
,

statement.
STOCKN.

field named DESC.
;Five—character numeric field.
;Four—character numeric field.
;Unreferencable unnamed field.
;Record named OUTBUF.
;Unnamed numeric field.
;Twenty-five character field.
;Unnamed field.
;Temporary storage field.
;Numeric field named ECOST.

D4
A25
D5
D4

ECOST,

;Alphanumeric

OUTBUF
,

PAGE

;Record

STOCKN, D4
DESC, A25
UCOST, D5
QORDER, D4
RECORD

8.00

V
COMPILATION LISTING
COMPILATION STATEMENT

OPTIONAL

;Unnamed record-temporary storage

RECORD

;cannot
TITLE,

DIBOL COMPILER

A6,

'OVRHED'

(COMP)

;Field

directly

initialized

referenced.
'OVRHED'.

COS

12—JUL-78

DIBOL

PROCEDURE

0260
0270
0280
0290

END

;Opens
;‘OUTPUT'
;Transfer

OUTBUF=INBUF

;INBUF moved

TITLE
on

8.00
PAGE 02
DIVISION

PROCEDURE
Procedure

Division.

channel l-input.
channel 2-output.

INBUF
to

EOF.

OUTBUF.

IF(STOCKN.LT.100) GO TO LOOP ;Conditional statement.
ECOST=UCOST*QORDER
;UCOST times QORDER moved to ECOST.
XMIT(2,0UTBUF)
;Transfer OUTBUF onto channel 2.
;

FINI

EOF,

0380

FINI

LOOP

;Branch control to LOOP.
;Identifies end of logical unit.
;Writes record and closes file.
;Stops program execution.
;Marks the end of the program.

(2)
(l)

END

5.1.2

Storage Map Listing

STOP

lZ-JUL-78

DIBOL

STORAGE

WED

TYPE

NAME

0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016

The

INIT(1,I,TITLE)
INIT(2,0, 'OUTPUT')
XMIT(1,INBUF,EOF)

0390
0400

DIVISION-BEGIN

;Beginning

LOOP,

0340
0350
0360
0370

0014

DATA

PROC

0300
0310
0320

COS

LISTING

COMPILATION

WED

DIVISION

INBUF

RECORD

STOCKN

DECMAL

DESC

ALPHA

UCOST

DECMAL

QORDER

DECMAL

OUTBUF

RECORD

ECOST

DECMAL

TITLE

ALPHA

..l
..2
..OUTP

DECMAL
ALPHA

LOOP

LABEL
LABEL

..1000

DECMAL

LISTING

DIM

SIZE

ORIGIN

01
01
01

49
04

20000
20002

25
05
04

20006

01
01
01
01
01
01

DECMAL

EOR

MAP

00
01

8.00

PAGE

~14

BUFFERS]

20037
20044
20062
20132
20146
20154
20155
20156
10110
10144
20164

49
09
06
01
01
06
01
01
04

01
01
00

labels

ERRORS

DETECTED.

CORE

storage map lists the record

REQUIRED

and

[3956

field

FREE

names

LOCS

and

the

labels

The information is arranged in
they
processed by the Compiler.
six columns with the following headings:
were

2.
contains the internal number of the name in
column
This number is only used in machine—level programming.

DIBOL COMPILER

(COMP)

5-3

is the name (field name, record name, program label) or
used
in
literal
the
Literals are
compiled program.
numeric or alphanumeric characters which appear in
the
Procedure
of
Division
the
source program.
Only the

NAME

first four characters of a numeric
Each numeric literal is preceded by

distinguish
four
map

describes

the

ALPHA

used

use

used

record

LABEL

used

program

less

get

Maximum

24K—byte
Use

5-4

the

for

lists
the

cannot

multiply

tempts

flagged

TAGl

SAVE

error

the

octal

command

DIBOL COMPILER

name

literal.

record

label.

label
not

label

the

referenced
TO TAGl

appear

the

the
pro—
in a program
label.

printer

even

The line
effect.
used is displayed.
of

number

fields)

column

name.

The

all

the

meaning—

size of
a
RECORD
its labels plus 2.

byte memory address of the

number

errors

the

detected,

bottom

the

name.

memory

required,

the

You
storage map.
suppress listing of storage map.

l6K-byte

511.

store

field

numeric

output

characters

allowed

(COMP)

types of labels.

other

systems,

program.

array dimension (number
or
numeric labels.
The

the

size

labels

larger

does

/N option

used,

the

example:

For

the

labels

undefined

locations are listed at
this information if you

defined
All
at(redefined).
definition
after
the
first are
errors
in the compiler listing.

This

number

gives

number

storage

once

the name of an alphanumeric field
alphanumeric literal.

RECORD

alphanumeric

the

than four char—
they occur in the
program.
a double
quote and end with

name

the name
literal.

contains

free

numeric

where

number

than

literals with

gram.
where

and

once

with

used.

single quote.

UNDEF***

The

only

occur

are

REDEF

ORIGIN

appear

may

are

periods (..)

Numeric

name.

literals

Numeric

DECMAL

SIZE

less

though they

DIM

internal

listed each time
literals begin with

acters

Record

TYPE

characters
even

program.

literal
two

binary

program.

system

365;

5.2

CONDITIONAL COMPILATION PROCEDURE

(CCP)

Conditional Compilation Procedure (CCP) is a feature which permits
to
include statements in a source program which will be compiled
if
you elect to have those statements compiled.
only

The

you

included in a program for conditional
closed within angle brackets as in the following

Statements

RECORD

compilation

are

en—

example.

D5
Bl,
A4
C1,
PROMPT, D1
RECORD

NAME,

A6
PROC

(PROMPT

XMIT(8,"ENTER NAMEz')
>

XMIT(7,N)
STOP
END

The

this
(<) is followed by a control variable (in
Unless
the
control variable is turned on before the
left angle bracket is encountered, statements between the angle brackwill be ignored.
A right angle bracket marks the end of a condi—
ets
tional area and is on a line by itself.
The command to turn on a control variable is as follows:

case

left

angle bracket

PROMPT).

=control

variable

The above program requires the operator to type in a name on the
key—
If
this same program is recompiled with the control variable
board.
PROMPT on, it produces a DIBOL program which first displays a
message
to the operator.
RECORD A
D5
Bl,
A4
C1,
PROMPT, Dl

NAME,

RECORD
A6

PROC
=PROMPT

;Turn

prompt.

<PROMPT

XMIT(8,"ENTER NAME:')
>

XMIT(7,N)
STOP
END

Conditional

source

vari-

to
statements
debug
compilation can also be used
Once the program has been tested, the control
program.
able can be removed by deleting the command to turn it on.

DIBOL COMPILER

(COMP)

5-5

also allows several similar (but not
combined into one source program.

CCP

the

programs

variable used

in a CCP statement is undefined, the comaside space for it;
this is wasteful of
automatically
used
for
some
CCP, use variables that are already being

control

will

piler

identical)

set

For
space.
other purpose.

The CCP value of
a
variable
(on
variable's ordinary DIBOL value.

off)

independent

the

CCP variable is used in the middle of a record definition (in the
Division
of a DIBOL program) the variable must have been previadditional
ously defined, otherwise the Compiler will allocate
space
for it in the middle of a record.
If

Data

sections can be
off will be

CCP

nested

CCP
section
that
is
any depth.
Any
To indicate that certain
ignored by the Compiler.
statements are not being used, the Compiler listing will not print the
line number for that statement.
There must be a matching > for each <
If this condition is not met,
used.
the
a
CCP
Compiler
generates
This error is fatal if angle brackets do not match by
ERROR
message.
to

turned

end

the

5.3

the

SIZE OF

program.

THE

BINARY

PROGRAM

Each variable uses as many bytes of memory as specified
in
its
data
definition
statement.
For
a variable defined
as
6D3 rem
example:
This is 9 words
since
a
word
quires 18 bytes of storage.
computer
consists of 2 bytes.

Variables
in

the

defined

record

in an overlay record
being overlaid.

Each RECORD statement
is reserved for
word
tions.
Each
If

record

the

Each

number,

begins on a
length is
used

storage
of

(in

numeric

memory with

the

variables

of
requires one additional word
memory.
the
COS-310
word
count
storing
during I/O

record

literal

quires
length

word
odd

the

literal

including leading

opera»

boundary (an even—numbered byte address).
(in bytes), one byte of memory is wasted.

Procedure

bytes)

This

Division of

DIBOL

program

re~

equal to the length of the literal.
in
is equal to the number of
digits

The
the

zeros.

fewer
characters
Each distinct literal with a length of four or
apThus, if the lit—
pears only once in the space reserved for literals.
eral 32 appears three times in the program, it will appear
only once
the
reserved data area.
in
However, literals larger than four characters require space each time they appear in the program.

5-6

DIBOL COMPILER

(COMP)

Each

statement

requires
than

the

Each statement label
an overhead of one word.
Unlabeled statements with line numbers 1000 more
line number require one additional word each.

requires
word.

one

The number of words of memory generated by
mined by the following formula:
Add

together the

Add

the

operators
Add

number
include

for

one

The

following

ous

DIBOL

each

table

number

variables

and

binary operators

subscript

shows

expression
literals

can

be deter—

used.

which appear.

The

binary

reference.

how many words

code

are

required by vari—

statements.

DIBOL

Table 5-1
of Code

Statement Words

Requirements
of Words of
Code Generated
No.

Statement

(y,x)

y+x+l
1

label
CHAIN chnum

CALL

chnum+l

(line,column,expr)
[/list control]

DISPLAY
END
FINI

(channel,skipcode)

(labell,...,labeln),key
(exprl.rel.expr2)stmnt

INCR

var

INIT

(channel,
(channel,

INIT
ON

ERROR

PROC
READ

dev)
dev,filnam[,unit])

label

[n] [/list control]
(channel,record,number)

RETURN
START

[/1ist control]

STOP

[NO]

TRACE

TRAP
var=

var=expr

var=exprl,expr2
WRITE
XMIT

channel+skipcode+l
l

label

GOTO
IF

channel+l

(channel)

FORMS
GOTO

line+column+expr+l

(channel,record,number)
(channel,record[,1abel])

key+n+2
exprl+expr2+3
var+l
channel+2

channel+3+filnam+unit
l
0

channel+number+record+l
l
0

1
l
2
var+l

var+expr+l*
var+expr1+expr2+l
channel+number+record+l
channel+record+2

the statement marked with an asterisk (*)
1 if the principal operator of exp:
subtract
both types are numeric.

For

in
is

the
previous
binary + or -,

DIBOL COMPILER

table,
and

(COMP)

5-7

Example:
words of

storage, while

3+5

takes

3*5
3+4+5

takes
takes
takes

5 words. Similarly,
6 words while
7 words.

3*(4+5)

Additional
table

label,

space is also
consists
of
two
or
literal used.

required by
words

5.4

COMPILER ERROR MESSAGES

Most

Compiler

error

for

the internal symbol table.
This
each distinct variable, statement

messages are printed on the
which the error occurs.
A

ly after the line

message points to
in the
are listed

the

approximate location

the

listing direct(A) in the error
Other

error.

errors

storage map listing.

Explanation

Message
BAD ALPHA

Initial value in
an
definition
statement
end
with
a
single

VALUE
'

NUMERIC

The

VALUE

initial

value

incorrectly

was

data
alphanumeric
did
not begin or
mark.
quotation

single quotes.

Insert

BAD

source

caret

numeric
field
Check and form

for
a
formed.

correctly.
BAD

PROC

The

number
from

digit
BAD

RELATIONAL

PROC
7.

statement
Enter

was

not

through 7.

in
IF
an
illegal relational occurs
For example, a .GX.
instead
Retype correctly.

statement.
of a .GT.
CCP

Matching angle

ERROR

COMMA

MISSING

comma

ed.
DATA

INITIALIZATION

MISSING

5-8

DIBOL COMPILER

(COMP)

appeared

Insert

missing.

where

one

was

expect“

comma.

initialization followed a
definition statement.
or
input initial value.

data

comma

bracket

brackets.

Insert

data

comma

Remove

Explanation

Message

EXPECTED LABEL

MISSING

label

required

missing.

Enter

label.
EXPRESSION NOT ALLOWED

complex expression
to

occurs
a

the

variable

bad

left of an
allowed.

character

where

only

and

cor-

at the end
Eliminate extra

a
of
char-

Find

rect.
EXTRA

CHARS

STMNT

END

Extra

characters

legal

occur

statement.

acters.

FIELD

TOO

ILLEGAL

LARGE

In a data description statement, the di—
or
more
than 3 digits
mension
was
0
long, or the field size was 0 or
larger
than
511.
Bring size dimensions within
limits.

OPERATOR

bad

in
an
was
encountered
an
where
operator would be
cor—
with
Check and replace

character

expression
expected.

character.

rect
ILLEGAL

The

STMNT

statement

tion

was

statement

with

not

(it

had

manipula—

data
no

nor

did

recognizable keyword.
sign.
appropriate keyword and use

start

it
Use

INITIAL

VALUE

WRONG

SIZE

data
The initial value in a
specificaa
tion
statement
had
length different
Make infrom the field size specified.

itial
LABEL

NOT

ALLOWED

PAREN

label

OPEN

PAREN

OPERAND

parenthesis occurred where
Add parenthesis.
expected.

one

where

one

open

was

MISSING

size.

with defined

was

MISSING

agree

the
wrong
expression was
record or a label which had
used.
Use
was
been redefined
unique
label of the correct type.

type

MISSING

value

parenthesis

expected.

Add

occurred

parenthesis.

an
expresbinary operator occurs in
or
with
no operand
following it;
is
occurs where one
no expression at all
Insert operand and/or appro—
expected.
priate expression.

sion

DIBOL COMPILER

(COMP)

5"9

Explanation

Message
BAD

MISSING OR

The

MODE

mode

ment

was

state—
INIT
designation in an
or
an
with
illemissing
began

gal character.
signation.
MISSING QUOTE

The

correct mode

Insert

statement contained
Delete

(').

quotes

de-

odd number of
quote when

add

appropriate.
MISSING

RELATIONAL

relational

ment.

PREVIOUSLY

NAME

NOT A

DEFINED

Enter

attempt was made
ously defined name.

character

in
A

LABEL

TOO

BIG

RECORD

STMNT

TOO BIG

TOO

was

not

label

‘1abel‘

oc-

required.

was

for
the
big
binary
Enlarge scratch area with

too

complex

Simplify

the

nest—

statement.

close
occurred
parenthesis
Enter appropriate
subscript.
punctuation.

comma

The

type of

Use

numeric

ITEMS

(COMP)

subscript
subscript.

was

not

numeric.

in
initialized
an
the field
Eliminate excess elements.

elements

than
array
dimension.

DIBOL COMPILER

occurred

statement where
character
Replace

The statement
ed too deep.

COMPLEX

SUBSCRIPT NOT NUMERIC

5-10

previ—

named record exceeded
510
characters
in
size.
Either use unnamed record or
reduce the size of record.

after

MANY

name.

SUBSCRIPT ERROR

TOO

area.

OPT-

unique

label.

proper

Binary output
PIP

than A

expected.

where

scratch

Use

symbol which

Enter

redefine

state-

specification

was

curred

PROGRAM

other

data

with A
NOT

IF
appeared in an
relational.
legal

were

are

specified in

Explanation

Message
TOO MANY

SYMBOLS!

fatal

message.
Only 365 symbols
symbol table in l6K-byte sys—
in
511
allowed
tem, and only
symbols
The compiler stops comlarger systems.

allowed

TOO

MUCH

DATA

NAME

Rewrite

and

TYPE

produced.

exceeds

24K

bytes.

program.

in
or

used which was not defined
Division.
Define this name
name already defined.

Mixed

data

sion,

types occurred in
argument which was

numeric
ments
in
be

was

can

shorten program.

Data

name

use

storage map

Division

Data

the

WRONG DATA

piling;

Rewrite
UNDEFINED

error

the

was
a

not,

one

expres-

supposed

the

argu—

manipulation statement
the
Replace
wrong
type.
data

data.

DIBOL

COMPILER

(COMP)

5-11

CHAPTER

DIBOL

DEBUGGING TECHNIQUE

The DIBOL Debugging Technique
If a program is compiled with

(DDT)
the

DDT

used

option

(DDT)

debug binary
programs.
(/D), the compiled binary

The
program automatically branches to DDT upon execution.
DDT
include
breakpoint, variable examination, subroutine
back, and iteration.

6.1

PROCEDURES

DDT OPERATING

execute

features of
call trace-

binary

with

program

DDT,

type:

pronam
RUN

[

][,filnaml...,filnam7]/D
chain0+chainl...+chain7

where:

pronam

the

name

the

loads
and
program name is omitted, the Monitor
the DIBOL program in the binary scratch area.

the

binary program

debugged.

executes

chain0+chainl...
programs which constitute one
into
several chained programs.
up
programs to be debugged.
are

binary

broken

large
These

program
are
the

filnaml...,filnam7
are

names

the

option

additional
in the
label

/D option.

source

switch
768
Data

files
that

the

system device.

requests DDT.

words of memory plus 3 words for each
Division are required because of the

DDT
The
DDT.
During execution of the program, control is passed to
followed by a hy—
an appropriate DDT version number
displays
program
phen (-) to indicate that it is ready to accept commands.

6.2

DDT COMMANDS

Command

variable=

Explanation
Display the

contents

Division).

variable

Variable

(a label

have

can

single

from the
double

Data

sub—

scripts.
variable=v

variable

Set

equal

(v is

legal

any

alphanumeric

string).
If

CMD

has

characters

than

Display

the

Set

the

last

Set

contents

the

variable

last

examined

breakpoint at line
at
a
given time.

tive

defined

Execute

variable,

ERR

the

breakpoint

variable examined.

equal

One breakpoint
is
breakpoint set at line

nnnn.

meaningless because the program
>n

for

displayed.

the

never

nth

executes

occurrence

line
of

ac-

is
0.

line

nnnn.

For

example:
-$300
->4

When

the

fourth

line
program starts to execute
the breakpoint is executed

time,

transferred

CTRL/Z

Start

for
the
300
and control is

DDT.

‘
If a breakpoint,
execution of DIBOL program.
Jr
at line number nnnn, control reverts to DDT when
is reached and the following message is printed:

set

nnnn

BREAK!

Type additional commands in response

6-2

DIBOL DEBUGGING TECHNIQUE

(DDT)

the

hyphen

(-).

TRAP
com—
lines from which calls (CALL or
made (pushdown stack) during execution of
to
used
This command is generally
the DIBOL program.
trace
the
execution of the program after a breakpoint
or
The
is
the
occurred.
system error has
usually

Display

the

mands)

were

shift/six key.
While

a
causes
breakpoint is pending, if a DIBOL program error
such
as
ILLEGAL
SUBSCRIPT
or
to
NUMBER
TOO
LONG
conmessage
appear,
trol is transferred to DDT;
DDT commands can be used for program
examination.
If an error is fatal, the DIBOL program cannot be restart—
ed by the CTRL/Z command.
a

DDT

Once

DIBOL

less

breakpoint

program

occurs

running
or

under

cannot be restarted un—
with a breakpoint pending.
to
return
to
breakpoint but want

error

DDT,

line

if you do not require a
for program examination if an error
number which will not be executed.

6.3

DDT

Therefore,
DDT

ERROR

occurs,

set

breakpoint

MESSAGES

Explanation

Message

ERR

DDT

occurs

CMD

Entered an invalid
mand and retry.

DDT

command.

Correct

DIBOL DEBUGGING TECHNIQUE

the

com—

(DDT)

6m3

CHAPTER 7
CROSS

The

Reference

Cross

velopment.

REFERENCE

(CREF)

Program

provides

table

PROGRAM

primarily an aid to program
an alphabetical
listing of

showing

labels used in a DIBOL source program,
label is defined, and the line numbers

7.1

CREF

execute
RUN

(CREF)

the
where

line
each

number

label

where
used.

de-

all
each

OPERATING PROCEDURES

CREF,

type:

CREF[,filnaml...,filnam7]

where:

filnaml...,filnam7
are

the

parts of

files
are
is used.

buffer
The

CREF

table
CREF

program reads the
the line printer,

bytes

or
use

and

source

specified,

(maximum
program
the program in the

lists
program,
control to

returns

the
the

cross-reference

Monitor.

not

minimal amount of error checking is performed by CREF;
no
be made to cross reference programs having compilation
should
If CREF finds a line it cannot work with, it prints:

nnnn

BEING

IGNORED

where:
nnnn

7).
edit

bytes of memory and can handle any 16K-byte
program
have an excessive number of symbols and labels.
If 24K
is available, CREF expands its cross-reference table
more
to
of the available space.

does

make

DIBOL

16K

requires

that

the

number

the

line

CREF

cannot

work

with.

attempt
errors.

Following is the cross—reference
1-1 of Chapter 1.
COS-310

CREF

LABEL

DEF

DESC

130

ECOST
EOF

220
390
110
310
170
150
120
260
140

INBUF

LOOP
OUTBUF

QORDER
STOCKN
TITLE

UCOST
LABELS

table

8.00

for

the DIBOL program

24—MAY-78

WED

Figure

PAGE

label

REFERENCES

340
310
310

330
320
340
330
280
340

DEFINED

BUT

NEVER

320
380
360

REFERENCED:

where:
LABEL

DEF

is the line
defined.

the

name

the

number

label

used

the

the program.

program where

the

REFERENCES
are

7.2

CREF

the

line

numbers

where

each

referenced.

Explanation
BEING

IGNORED

CREF

with.

detected

Usually

statement.
statement

7-2

ERROR MESSAGES

Message

nnnn

label

CROSS REFERENCE PROGRAM

(CREF)

line
means

Check line
and retry.

cannot

work

invalid
number for

DIBOL

valid

CHAPTER
PERIPHERAL

The
cal

INTERCHANGE

PROGRAM

(PIP)

Peripheral Interchange Program (PIP) moves files between two logi—
units, copies the contents of one device onto another, and consol—

idates

files
to

space

the

8.1

PIP

execute
RUN

free

remove

binary scratch

PIP

also

used

allocate

area.

PROCEDURES

OPERATING

PIP,

blocks.

type:

PIP[,cmndfl][/n]

where:

,cmndfl

stored file
PIP
commands.
containing
is on a separate line;
no blank
lines or
comments are used.
When the command file is specified,
PIP
a
line
from the file each time one of the
reads
following prompts is displayed:
a

previously

Each

command

OPTIN-

OUT—
MORE?
TYPES
An

24K

FILES

end—of—file mark

quires
The

all

responses

command file is
of memory

bytes

SKIPPED

terminates
to

come

the

from

(S,B,V):
command file
the keyboard.

ignored on machines
capabilities.

with

and

less

re—

than

Example:
If

the

cmndfl

EXAMP

0100

0110
0120
0130

RXO

.RUN

PIP,EXAMP

contains:

Rxl
X

Then:

indicates the number (0-9) of
the binary scratch area.
The

junction
the
PIP

RUN

to
allocate
used in con—
that
the
time

segments to

/n switch

with OPT- E, but is entered
command is typed.

PIP

the

RUN

PIP

command

with:

8.00

(or

current

version

number)

the

following options:

Option

Explanation

responds
PIP

;will copy RXO to RXl.

OPT-

Respond with

one

transfer

C
D

copy device
transfer a data

consolidate

copy

you

Following is
requested by

8-2

space

file
system file
to Monitor

transfer
transfer

return

PIP

source

displays

and

OUT

questions

requesting

information.

summary of the PIP options
the IN and OUT questions.

PERIPHERAL

file

directory

and

respond,

option-dependent

verify data
perform a read/check

After

binary file

INTERCHANGE

PROGRAM

(PIP)

and

the

information

being

OPT

OUT

filnam[,dev]

dev

filnam[/logical unit #]

filnam[/logical unit #1

/L
/T

‘dev

dev
dev

filnam[,dev}
filnam[,dev]

S
V

8.1.1

Transfer

Binary

filnam[,dev]
filnam[,dev]

File

(OPT- E)

B in response to OPTfile~oriented devices.

Type

move

binary

program

between

two

question with the name of the binary program to be moved
If no de—
optionally, a comma and an input device
designation.
vice is designated, the system device is assumed.
the

Answer

and,

the

Answer

file

and,
is

device
If

you

to
the
question with the name to be
assigned
a
comma
and
an
device
optionally,
output
designation.
designated, the system device is assumed.

OUT

attempt

OUT message

move

data

from

non—file—oriented

output
If

device,

the

repeated.

Example:
.RUN

PIP

PIP V8.00
OPT- B

;Request

TEST,DKO
OUT- TEST,DKl

;File named
;File named

IN-

OPT-

8.1.2

binary file.

Test

from

Test

DKO.

DKl.

Copy Device

Type C in response
similar

move

(OPT- C)

OPT-

copy

the

contents

one

device

onto

device.

Answer

the

Answer

the

OUT

question with
question with

device

designation.

PERIPHERAL INTERCHANGE PROGRAM

(PIP)

8u3

Example:
.RUN

PIP

V8.00

OPT- C

;Request a copy between devices.
;Input device is DKO.

IN- DKO

OUT- DK3
OPT- X

8.1.3

Type

;Output device is DK3.

Transfer

response

Answer

the

number

(1-15)

Files

Data

OPT-

(OPT- D)

transfer

question with a file
preceded by a slash,

and

name

files

data

answer

When

devices.

optionally, a logical unit
the IN question with /K.

Answer the OUT question with a file name
and
unit
number
or
a slash,
answer
preceded
by
device switch.
Output device switches are:

/L
/T

between

a
optionally,
logical
the OUT question with a

printer
screen

the

end

the

input

file

reached,

PIP

asks:

MORE?
N

TURN

key

PIP

the

and

Type

RETURN

specify

key

there

input

and

the

RE—

treated

input.

A negative
transfers alphanumeric data only.
letter which has the equivalent code.

number

Examples:
.RUN PIP
PIP V8.00
0PT- D

IN-

EMPNAM/l

:Dump

EMPNAM

from

logical

unit

onto

the

printer.

OUT- /L
MORE? N
OPT- X
.RUN

PIP

V8.00

OPT- D
IN- HRPAy,2

;Combines

two

data

files

OUT- PAYFIL/l
MORE? Y
IN-

SALPAY,3

MORE? N
0PT- x

8-4

PERIPHERAL INTERCHANGE PROGRAM

(PIP)

into

one

output file.

Consolidate Space

8.1.4

Directory (0PT- E)

to consolidate the free blocks on the input
files on the output device.
It is possible to
or
kinds of files
erase one or two of
(source,
system)
binary,
file
Free
blocks
are
shown
in
the
the
consolidation.
directory
during
and are created when a file is deleted from the directory.
The
boot—
strap, Monitor, and logical units are not copied by OPT- E.

Type

response
store
and

device

Answer

the

Answer

the

OUT

the
the

nates

the

with

question

free

device

system device

the

space

device

question with

consolidating

When

OPT-

shown

files

after

itself,

onto

DEVICE

files

designation.
OPT-

PIP

elimi-

below:

SYSTEM

before

designation.

(SYS)

logical

unit

files

logical

unit

free

another
consolidating a device other than the system device onto
device, PIP OPT- E consolidates the free space but does not COpy logi-

When
cal

units.

NONSYSTEM

before

files

The

following

idated,

and

TYPES

files

message
stored.
FILES

files

after

DEVICE

logical

unit

files

free

asks
The
BE

which files you do
files you choose to
SKIPPED

not

want

skip will

copied,
be

consol—

erased.

(S,B,V):

PERIPHERAL INTERCHANGE PROGRAM

(PIP)

files

all

RETURN

key.

(erased),

type

separated by
The

are

one

following example

source

files

from DKO

and

stored,

the

type

the types of files are to be skipped
B
combination of two of the characters S,
V,

and

comma

consolidated,

copied,
two

followed

the

consolidate
DKl.

will
to

RETURN

free

key.

space

will

but

not

copy

Example:
.RUN PIP
PIP V 8.00

OPT-

IN-

DKO

OUT-

TYPES

DKl
OF

FILES

All CTRL keys
is completed.

8.1.5

SKIPPED

until

ignored

are

Allocate Space

Binary

The PIP OPT- E is used in
the
binary scratch area.
mand.

Extremely large
the

two

The

the

PIP

OPT-

Scratch Area

consolidation

operation

(OPT— E)

with /n to change
the
/n is typed along with the RUN

conjunction
The

need

programs may

space

(32 blocks) usually allocated
segments can be allocated with

size
PIP

available

than

the binary
PIP OPT- E.
to

of
com—

scratch

PIP operation will allocate two additional segments
(32
This particular operation
the binary scratch area on DKO.
the /n option typed in the RUN PIP command.

following

blocks)
uses

nine

area.

DIBOL

segments

(S,V,B):

.RUN PIP/2
PIP V 8.00

The

size

OPT-

IN-

DKl

OUT-

DKO

TYPES

FILES

SKIPPED

(S,V,B):

following information is helpful
of the binary scratch area.
0

the

binary
the two
number
mand.

8-6

when

using

OPT-

change

the

input device, the size of the
output device equals the sum of
in
the
segments normally
binary scratch area plus the
of
segments stipulated by the /n in the RUN PIP com-

output device
scratch

area

not

PERIPHERAL INTERCHANGE PROGRAM

the

(PIP)

device is consolidated onto itself, the
binary scratch
is set either to the size of the current area or to 2+n,
a
device
onto
itself
C an
whichever is less.
Compressing
shrink the binary scratch area.
The binary scratch area cannot be expanded if a device is being compressed
onto
itself
If

area

that

because

Copy and Verify
in

response

OPT-

and

verify

the

copy.

Answer

the

Answer

the

OUT

over

existing files.

PIP

command,

the

size

same

the

binary
binary

(OPT- I)

device

Type

require writing

If /n is not specified in the RUN
is
to be
scratch
area
assumed
scratch area of the input device.

8.1.6

would

question

with

copy

device

question with

entire

device

onto

similar

designation.

device

designation.

Example:
.RUN

PIP

V8.00

OPT-

;Request copy and verify.
;Input device is DKl.

DKl
OUT— DK2
IN-

Type

Answer
No

OUT

DK2.

configuration includes
bytes of memory.

32K

Perform

machine

your

require

8.1.7

;Output device

OPT—

the

Read/Check

OPT—

question

LQP printer,

OPT-

PIP

will

(OPT— R)

verify

with

the

readability

designation

the

device.

device

read.

question is displayed.

Example:
.RUN

PIP

V8.00

OPT—

IN-

DKl

OPT-

;Request Read/Check.
;Read contents of DKl.

PERIPHERAL

INTERCHANGE

PROGRAM

(PIP)

8--7

Transfer

8.1.8

Source

S in response to
file—oriented devices.

Type

Files

(OPT— S)

OPT—

transfer

source

files

between

two

the IN question with the name of the source file to
be
trans—
ferred
If
and, optionally, a comma and the input device designation.
no device
is specified, the system device is assumed.

Answer

the OUT question with the name to be
assigned
file
and, optionally, a comma, and the output device
no device
is specified, the system device is assumed.

Answer

the

output

designation.

Example:
.RUN

PIP

V8.00

OPT—

;Request transfer of source file.
;Transfer TEST from DKO.
;Receive TEST into DKl.

IN-

TEST,DKO
OUT— TEST,DK1
OPT-

you

attempt
OUT

8.1.9

transfer

from

non-file-oriented

device,

the

between

two

question is repeated.

Transfer

(OPT— V)

System Program

V in response to OPTfile-oriented devices.

Type

move

system

program

to
be
of
the
the IN question with the name
system
program
transferred and, optionally, a comma and the designation for the input
If no device is specified, the system device is assumed.
device.
Answer

Answer

the

file,

and,

device

OUT

question

optionally,

specified,

with
a

the

comma

the

name

and

system

assigned

the output device
device is assumed.

the

output

designation.

Example:
.RUN

PIP

PIP V8.00
OPT—

SORT,DKl
OUT— SORT,DK3
IN-

OPT-

you

8-8

attempt
OUT

;Request transfer of system program.
;Transfer SORT from DKl.
;Transfer SORT to DK3.

question

transfer

from

non—file-oriented device,

repeated.

PERIPHERAL INTERCHANGE PROGRAM

(PIP)

the

8.1.10

Type

Return

to Monitor

response

(0PT- X)

0PT~

terminate PIP and return to the Monitor.

OPT— x feature is useful when PIP is included in a string of Mon—
This
itor

commands
and

PIP program

in a BATCH program.
The OPT- x signals the end of the
the next Monitor command in the BATCH program is
exe-

cuted.

8.2

PIP

ERROR MESSAGES

Explanation

Message

BAD

DIRECTORY

on
to reference or store a file
a
with a damaged or nonexistent directo—
Only files with directories can be used.
call
is
the
directory
damaged,
your

Attempted
device
ry.
If

Software
COMPARISON

ERROR

Specialist.

disverification part of OPT- I found a
of information between the original
its copy.
If
Retry the operation.
a
have
media
continue,
discrepancies
you
problem or a hardware problem.

The

crepancy
text and

ILLEGAL

NO ROOM

DEVICE

SWITCH

OPT- D
that
switch was specified for
/K for input or /L or /T for output.
of the allowable switches.
one
A

was

not

Use

Attempted to store a file
Stipulate another device.

PERIPHERAL

INTERCHANGE

full

PROGRAM

device.

(PIP)

8-9

SORT

CHAPTER

PROGRAM

(SORT)

utility program that arranges
to
needs.
according
your
fixed-length records.

SORT

files

data

the
records
within
The data files must

COS-310
contain

command
file
Before you can execute SORT you must write a SORT
the records to be sorted, specifies labels for input and
defines
to
be
in
used
put files, and designates the arrangement (key)

that
out-

the

sort.

command

file

rearrange one data file at a time.
file for each file sorted.

SORT

uses

must

separate SORT command

The

SORT

ately.

file

command
A merge

There

file
each volume of a multivolume
separ—
then be done to combine the volumes into one

sorts
must

pass

file.

9.1

SORT OPERATING

execute
RUN

SORT,

PROCEDURES

type:

SORT,cmndfll...,cmndfl7[/L]

where:

cmndfl]...,cmndfl7
is the SORT command file
than
This
one
file.

the
specifies
designates the arrangement (key) to
files are specified, the command file in

sorted,

files,
If

which can be
as
more
stored
file defines the records to be
for
and
labels
input
output

and

buffer

used.

lists

the

SORT

command

file

the

printer.

used,

the

edit

9.2

SORT COMMAND FILE

The

command file
storage device.

SORT

mass

Division and

Record

9.2.1

The
to

Record
be

is
The

created with editor commands and written on a
command file consists of a Record Descriptor

INPUT/OUTPUT Division.

Descriptor Division
Division defines the
division has the form:

fields within

Descriptor

stored.

This

the

records

and

DEFINE

Fs,

where:

is the division
first statement

DEFINE

(must be

heading
in

the

DEFINE)

the

file.

the fields in the record (must be P).
All
fields
be
defined in the Record Descriptor Division and
numbered in the order they appear in the record.
These

are

must

numbers (5)
with
l, are nonskipped sequential,
begin
and cannot exceed 511.
Total record size cannot exceed
510 characters.
xn

represents

field

and

the

the
number

type

(alphanumeric

characters

Each field descriptor statement (F5)
is
and is terminated with the RETURN key.

(1-510)

the

numeric),
field.

consecutive

lines

names
of
and
INPUT/OUTPUT Division specifies the
input
files
and how many logical units are to be used for work areas
the SORT operation.
This division has the following format:

during

9.2.2

entered

INPUT/OUTPUT Division

The

INPUT

[SORT
KEY

[filnam][/logical unit #][,filnam][/logical
/logical unit #,...logical unit #1

Fs[(m,n)][-],...
[filnam][/logical unit #]

OUTPUT
END

9-2

SORT PROGRAM

(SORT)

unit

output

where:

INPUT

[filnam][/logical unit #][.filnam][/logical unit #]
to
be
is the name of the file containing the
records
If
sorted.
no
name
is specified, SORTIN is assumed.
If the command file is used for a separate merge opera-

the second file
tion,
merged with the first.

is the name of a file to be
the
The logical units identify
the file.

storage location of

[SORT

name

/logical unit #...,logical unit #1
is
as

the

number

work

of logical units
during the sort.
If
$WORK2...,etc.

(n)

areas

labeled $WORK1,
is
not
present,
work units should
file.
The
input
units.

KEY

Using

These work
the
SORT

used

areas

are

statement

4 units are assumed.
The size of the
be as large
as
one
volume
of
the
logical unit numbers are default work
default units bypasses the MOUNT message.

Fs[(m,n)][—],...
to
number(s) of the field
delimit
the
The
[(m,n)]
key.
part
If
no
be used as a SORT
charkey.
are
entire field is used as a
acters
the
specified,
The
order.
SORT key.
requests a SORT in
descending
to eight fields or parts of fields can be specified
Up
The total size of the
which
for the SORT key.
fields
Fs

be
of

is the field
used as the
the field to

name

(F)

and

SORT

—

the key cannot be larger than 510 characters.
is done left to right.
leftmost
The
is
key
most
and
the leftmost character in each
significant,
key field is most significant for sorting purposes.

comprise
The

OUTPUT

SORT

[filnam][/logical

unit

is the file name to be given to the sorted records.
If
this statement is missing, SORT assigns the name SRTOUT
For multivolume files,
to the output.
the names $TMPnn
(nn can be any two—character numeric from 00 to 99) are
used.
The /1ogical unit number is the default unit for
the output file.

END

terminates

control

program.

SORT PROGRAM

(SORT)

9-3

Following

9.3

example

0010
0020
0030
0040
0050
0060
0070
0080
0090

DEFINE

0100

OUTPUT

0110

END

INPUT

SORT
KEY

execute

SORT

command

file:

;Part number.

Fl,D6
F2,A30
F3,D7
F4,D6
F5,D6

MERGE

RUN

;Date.

PRTFIL/l
4/2,3,4,5

file

;Data

name.

;Work units.

Fl-,F4

;Sort part numbers

in descending
;Sort date in ascending order.
;Sorted data file name.

PRTFIL/l

order,

OPERATING PROCEDURE

SORT

operation,

merge

type:

SORT,cmndf11...,cmndfl7/x[L]

where:

cmndfll...,cmndfl7
is

the

command

file

(possibly

stored

two

files).
/x

one

the

following

switches:

names

from
files to be merged are entered
the
in
to
FILE
LAanswer
the
INPUT
keyboard
message
BELS:.
The output data file and default unit name
are
in
the OUTPUT line of the command
specified
file.

names

of files
line of

INPUT

the

bypasses the message
/n

files

merged

SORT

INPUT

listed
in
the
This option
file.

are

command
FILE

LABELS:.

files
must
have
be merged (all
of
the
is
listed
in
the
INPUT
line
name)
of
command file.
This checks for the number
with the same name on the number of default
files
units as specified.
If the number of units speci—
fied is more than the number of units shown on the

name

the
SORT

same

SORT

control INPUT line, a MOUNT message
is
for those files not on the INPUT line.

dis—

played
/L

9-4

can

optionally

and

lists

SORT PROGRAM

(SORT)

the

be
SORT

used with any of
control program

the
on

above
the

switches

printer.

Merge Using SORT and the /A Option

9.3.1

the

use

write

SORT program with

Following
0100
0110

sample

the

/A option

merge

data

first

files,

file.
command

file

named

PAYKEY:

DEFINE

F1,A6
F2,D5
F3,D11

0120

0130
0140
0150
0160
0170
0180
To

command

SORT

INPUT
SORT 3/l,2,3
KEY F2
OUTPUT

PAYROL/6

END

this

execute

sample command file with the

SORT

and

program

the

option, type:
SORT,PAYKEY/A

~RUN

The program displays the
data files to be merged:
INPUT

FILE

Enter

two

up
least

the
a

0100
0110
0120

0130

Enter

file names and default units, the program is
exethree SORT work units:
logical units 1, 2, and 3.
file is PAYROL;
the sorted file is stored on unit 6.
are

SORT

names

the

program

the

with

the

/M Option
/M option

merge

data

files,

first

file.

command

Following

request the

maximum of six data file names and default units.
or
the error message N0 INPUT is displayed.

Merge Using SORT and

use

names

you enter
There
cuted.
The output data

9.3.2

message

LABELS:

After

write

following

sample command

file

named

PAYKEY:

DEFINE

F1,A6
F2,D5
F3,Dll

0140

INPUT

0150

SORT

0160
0170

OUTPUT

0180

END

KEY

PAYROL/4,
3/1,2,3

PAYl/Z

PAYROL/6

SORT PROGRAM

(SORT)

9-5

this

execute

sample command file with the

and

the

INPUT

line

SORT program

option, type:
.RUN

SORT,PAYKEY/M

input data file
control file:

The
the

PAYROL

PAYl

Merge Using

use

the
the

file,

the

SORT

same

name,
common

name

logical unit

The output data

9.3.3

names

are

found

the

unit

PAYROL,

SORT

merged

the

and

put

logical

/n Option

files
with
data
program with the /n option to merge
first write a command file.
The INPUT line contains
to the files and the default units where the files are

found.

Following

0100
0110
0120
0130
0140
0150
0160
0170
0180
To

The

9-6

sample

command

file

named

PAYKEY:

DEFINE

F1,A6
F2,D5
F3,Dll
INPUT
SORT
KEY

PAYROL/4,2
3/l,2,3

OUTPUT

PAYROL/6

END

this

execute

option,

sample command file with the SORT program and

type:

.RUN

SORT,

input

data

PAYROL

PAYKEY/Z
files

logical unit
logical unit

SORT PROGRAM

(SORT)

merged
4

are:

the

9.4

SORT ERROR MESSAGES

Explanation

Message

BAD

DIGIT

NUMERIC

INITIAL

VALUE

character in a numeric iniUse only numeric characters
tial value.
in initial numeric values.

Alphanumeric

BAD

RECORD

contains

File

SIZE

All

length.
the

same

of
records
variable
records to be stored must
record
Redefine
length.

length.
BAD WORK

Number

COUNT

UNIT

work
work

Specify

units

in
3-7.
range
within
allowable

not

units

range.
EXTRA

CHARS

FIELD

NUMBER MISSING

Characters not relating to statement apon
Delete any
the statement line.
pear
from
statement
nonessential characters
lines.

END

STMNT

Field

number

missing,

than

equal

greater

missing number
1
ILLEGAL

SORT

and

Bad

KEY

enter

is
or
is
0,
512.
Enter the
a
number between

511.

syntax

KEY

statement,

KEY

complex,

Review key
file.

information

statement

and

KEY

too

missing.

correct

com-

mand
ILLEGAL

INITIAL

UNIT

ALPHA

VALUE

Default

unit

Correct

command

DOESN'T BEGIN WITH

than

greater

15.

file.

QUOTE

Beginning quotation mark missing for initial
value.
Put single
alphanumeric
the
iniquotation at the beginning of
tial
INITIAL

VALUE

TOO

INITIAL

VALUE

TOO SMALL

BIG

value.

The initial value
is
specified
larger
than
the
field
size.
Either define a
of
larger field size or reduce the size
the initial value.

The initial value specified
is
than
the
field
size.
Either
the field size or increase the
the initial value.

SORT

PROGRAM

smaller

redefine
size

(SORT)

9-7

Explanation

Message

MISSING

QUOTE ON ALPHA INITIAL VALUE
of
the

MISSING

INITIAL VALUE

not

inserted after

Comma was

COMMA AFTER FIELD NAME

Add

but
initial
value
Either delete comma
value.
NO

end

specified at the
alphanumeric initial value.
missing close quotation marks.

Quotation mark

comma

specified.

insert

character

not

size

and

type

was

other

initial

than

comma

after
the
field
name.
specified
Enter the missing comma or delete incor—

was

rect
NO

and

then

the

enter

comma.

Input file

is null or not
enough
input
files
Two files
specified for a merge.
are needed
two
to execute a merge.
Use
nonempty files.

INPUT

NOT

character

character other than A or D occured in
data
specification statement where A
or
D was expected.
command
Correct the
file.

NOTHING AFTER

FIELD

NAME

Field
after

command
NUMBER

REPEATED

OR OUT

and

type

field

size
and

name

Correct

the

used

file.

ORDER

field sequence
once
or
is
than

Correct

sequence.
OUTPUT

specified

not

are

comma.

number
out of
the

ascending

command

order
file.

error.
Start
SORT
Indicates
an
I/O
If it continues, check for media
or
hardware problem.

ERROR

over.

TOO

MANY

FILES

specified.

Specify

files
UNIT

FREE

for

This
tive

that

are

merge

not

message
free.

than

Merge only,

command

file.

error.

showing

the

files
than six

input
more

COS

informa—

logical units
logical unit

number.
UNRECOGNIZABLE

9-8

LINE

SORT PROGRAM

(SORT)

Parameter

line

keyword.

Correct

did

not

the

start

command

with a good
file.

CHAPTER 10
FILE

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

(FILEX)

File Exchange Program (FILEX) transfers files between diskettes in
format and any COS—310 file storage device or any OS/8 file
universal
on an RK05 disk
or
from
to
disk(OS/8 files cannot be transferred
The

ettes).
Files

are

transferred

one

three

formats:

ASCII,

IMAGE,

EBCD-

The EBCDIC format is compatible with diskettes
(universal format).
an
IBM
3741
produced by
except when using multivolume universal inter—
IC

change files

10.1

UNIVERSAL

when

bad

mapping

sectors.

DISKETTE

diskette contains 77 tracks (some of which cannot be
used
A sector
Each track has 26 sectors numbered from 1 to 26.
contains one record of 128 characters or less.
(See Figure 10—1 for a
visual representation of a universal diskette.)

universal
for data).

record

preceded

record

a
a

COS-310

file

word

count

assumed

and

independent

string
sector

of
characters
A
boundaries.

universal diskette in EBCDIC format must begin on a sector
and
one
record is allowed per sector.
If the record
boundary
only
does not fill a sector, the remainder of the
sector
is
filled
with
blanks.
Since
these restrictions make EBCDIC format inefficient and
wasteful of space, only use EBCDIC when you must read or
write
disk—
ettes compatible with IBM 3741 format.
on

Track 0 of the
the
describes
diskette has a

contains
the
universal
diskette
diskette.
Each of
files
on
the
specific function.

information
the

sectors

which
on

10- p. .»
I

Function

Sector

1-6

Reserved.

Identifies

the

diskette

format.

If bytes 0—3 contain VOLl
diskette
is
assumed
to
format directory.
remainder of
which FILEX does
The

8-26

Contain
sectors

128
tails
number
to

Each

sector
not

EBCDIC

have

characters,

universal

contains

other

the

interchange
information

use.

the
the labels or
These
directory entries.
contain
information such as record length (up
For further
de—
characters) and creation date.
on
these
sectors refer to the IBM manual, form
GA21-9128—0.

byte

sectors

8-26

has

Function

Bytes
0—3

special function.

Are

for

HDRl

label

(DDR1

identification
if the file has

and contain
been delet-

ed).
6-13

Contain

the

file

23-27

Specify

the

record

29—30

Contain

name.

length.

EBCDIC

two

identify the track
ning of the data.
31

Must

32-33

Contain

EBCDIC
two

Contain

the

reserved for
EBCDIC 0.
38-39

Contain

identify
reserved
48—53

10-2

FILE

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

Contain

(FILEX)

which

begin—

(360 octal).

EBCDIC

identify the sector
ning of data.
35-36

characters
number at the

of
number
this file.

the

Byte

last
track
37 must be

characters
EBCDIC
the
number of the last
for this file.
two

creation year,

month,

which

begin_

and

which
sector

day.

Function

Bytes
75-76

Contain

Must

78-79

Contain

the

track

EBCDIC

the

number.

number

the

unused

sector.

‘5

esqxe

[/‘i 4
r

FlCATlON

a?\\
Figure 10—1

Universal

FILE

Diskette

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

(PILEX)

10~3

in
universal
are never
used
a
interchange
universal diskette is stored in either 7—bit
data
on
a
ASCII format is equivalent to data written
as
ASCII or 8-bit EBCDIC.
a
continuous string of bytes ignoring sector boundaries;
records are
terminated by a carriage return/line feed.
The first record of a file
on a sector boundary.
All character code translation and
must
begin
record blocking is done implicitly by FILEX and need not be explicitly

COS-310 character codes
All

file.

specified.
File

extensions

name

format;

change

are

universal
inter—
normally recognized in
single eight-character file name is used.
has
degree of compatibility with 08/8, FILEX
not

instead,

In order to provide some
been designed to accept a six—character file name with a two—character
than
six
extension.
If a file name on a universal diskette has more
File names
characters, it must be entered in the format of filnam.ex.
it
or
between
must not include spaces anywhere within the file name
and the extension.

10.2

FILEX OPERATING

execute
RUN

FILEX,

PROCEDURES

type:

[,cmndfl]

FILEX

where:

,cmndfl

the

table

name

desired

containing
previously created file
logical unit assignments.

the

the command file option is not used, FILEX uses
logical unit assignments already in the system.
If

RX02
command file is used, FILEX uses a special
that reads and writes RXOl compatible diskettes
and assigns logical unit numbers on RXOl and RX02 disk~
the same system, provided the system is con_
in
ettes
kind
this
for
RXOZS.
usually
Assignments of
figured
cannot exist on the same system.
If

the

handler

These

RX02

completed,
become

the

Following

FILEX V8.00

OPT
Enter
or

10-4

(C,

the

one

(or
L,

however,

all

logical

When
effect.
units assigned

FILEX
to

RXOls

undefined.

FILEX

RUN

remain

assignments

command,

the

program

displays:

version number)

current

2):

options;

Zero

(clear).

FILE

EXCHANGE PROGRAM

COPY;

(FILEX)

Delete;

List;

exit;

10.3

(OPT:C)

COPY

If you select op—
copies the contents of one file onto another.
the
tion
C,
system requests the input mode (the directory structure
and the file format) of the file to be copied.

OPT:C

INPUT

(A,

MODE

Type the letter
ASCII

(A),

10.3.1

(D),

Data

ASCII

format

ASCII

U):

corresponding

COS—310

05/8

the input
mode
Universal (U).

OS/8

used:

(Mode A)

Input

that

to
or

by 08/8.

used

you

select

input

mode

the

displays:

program

FILE

Type the

NAME:

file

and

name

the

device

designation in

the

form:

following

filnam[.ex][,dev]
where:

filnam[.ex]
is

six-character or less file name plus
extension
the
identifying

optional

file

two—character

input.
is a three-character device designation.
08/8 RXOl and
COS-310 RXOl diskettes are incompatible so do not specify an RXn device designation.

,dev

If the device
assumed.
If

the

file

not

specified,

given already exists,

name

FILEX

the

system

device

displays:

REPLACE?

Type

Having

for

YES,

established

OUTPUT

Sections

MODE

10.3.4

any

the

(A,

other

character

input file
S,

name,

for
the

NO.

program

displays:

U):

through 10.3.4.4 explain

the

OUTPUT

FILE EXCHANGE

MODE.

PROGRAM

(FILEX)

10-5

(Mode D)

COS-310 Data Input

10.3.2

you select
FILE

the

input mode D,

program

displays:

NAME:

Type the file
filnam

logical unit #

the

and

name

unit

[/logical

the

following

form:

identifying

the

where:

filnam

is
be

six—character

been

OUTPUT

Sections

10.3.3

you

given

the

MODE

(A,

10.3.4

DISKETTE

logical unit where

input file
D,

Input

mode

input
DATA

the

name,

MODE

the

program

file

FILE

Type the

one

found.

displays:

U)
the

OUTPUT

MODE.

(Mode U)

the

(A,

program

displays:

U):

Type the letter corresponding to the diskette data mode
U, Universal.
A, ASCII;
I, Image;
If you select any
gram displays:

file

the

through 10.3.4.4 explain

Universal

select

name

identifies

Having

less

input.

unit

[/logical

the

diskette

data modes

used:

the

pro—

NAME:

input

file

name

the

following

form:

filnam[.ex][,RXn]
where:

filnam[.ex]
name
an
or
less
is a
six-character
optional
plus
the
identifies
This
name
extension.
two-character
input file.

10-6

FILE

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

(FILEX)

,RXn

After

you

type the file

OUTPUT

Sections

10.3.4

MODE

10.3.4

(A,

through

Output Modes

you

OS/8

select

FILE

RX;

file;

ASCII

displays:

FILEX

name,

U):

10.3.4.4

explain

the

(A, D,

are:

08/8 ASCII;

The four output modes
COS-310 source file;

10.3.4.1

Must
three-character device designation.
it
is
mounted.
on
which
the
drive
represents
a

and

Universal

OUTPUT

MODE.

D, COS-310
diskette.

data

(Mode A)

Output

output mode A,

the

program

displays:

NAME:

Type the file

and

name

the

device

designation

the

following

form:

filnam[.ex][,dev]
where:

filnam[.ex]
is a six-character or less file name plus
an
optional
This file name identifies the
two-character extension.
file where output is to go.

three—character designation
is to go.
OS/8 RXOl
ettes are incompatible so do not

,dev

the

and

output

the
device
COS-310 RXOl

specify

RXn

where
disk—
device

designation.
If the device
assumed.

Type the
OPT

file name;

(C,

OS/8 files

FILEX

not

executes

specified,
the

the

transfer

and

system

returns

device

to:

Z):

For this and other
always multiples of 16 blocks long.
be
files
reasons,
resulting 08/8 output
may
longer than necessary.
Use the 05/8 PIP program /A to recover the unnecessary space.
are

the

FILE EXCHANGE PROGRAM

(FILEX)

10-7

COS-310 Data File

10.3.4.2

you

select

FILE

Output (Mode D)

output mode D,

the

program

displays:

NAME:

Type the file

name

logical unit #

and

the

following

form:

filnam[/logical unit #1
where:

filnam

is a six—character
where output is to

/logical

less

identifying

name

the

file

go.

unit

#
identifies

the

unit

logical

where

the

output

transfer

and

returns

file

found.

Type

the

file

OPT

(C,

10.3.4.3

FILE

Type the

executes

the

to:

2)):

COS-310 Source

select

you

FILEX

name;

File Output

output mode S,

the

(Mode S)

displays:

program

NAME:

file

name

the

following

form:

filnam
where:

filnam

output file

The
To

is a six—character or
COS—310 output file.

correct

file, do

10-8

the

generated

directory entry

FETCH

and

WRITE

less

blocks
to

name

assigned

the

length

the

long.

reflect

the

actual

follows:
file

have

just

created.

filnam

;Fetch

filnam/Y

;The WRITE command enters the correct file
The /Y switch
;length into the directory.
message response when
;bypasses the REPLACE?
;a duplicate file name is encountered.

FILE

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

the

(FILEX)

you

Type the file
OPT

10.3.4.4

(C,

executes

MODE

diskette

to:

returns

Z):

output mode U,
DATA

and

transfer

the

Universal Diskette Output

DISKETTE

three

you select

The

FILEX

name;

(A,

the

data modes

(Mode U)

displays:

program

U):
ASCII;

are:

Univer—

Image;

sal.
Select diskette data mode A
the program displays:
FILE

Type

the

(ASCII),

(Image),

(Universal),

and

NAME:

file

name

the

form:

following

filnam[.ex][RXn]
where:

filnam[.ex]
is a
or
six—character
two—character
extension

less
to

plus
assigned

name

optional

the

output

file.
is

,RXn

you

and

selected

returns

OPT

(C,

Must
three—character device designation.
the
drive
on
which
it
is
mounted.
represents
a

diskette

data mode

FILEX

performs

the

RX;

transfer

to:

Z):

An ASCII
diskette data mode A or I, sector boundaries are ignored.
transfer (A) deletes nulls and rubouts, removes parity, and terminates
writes
each record with a RETURN.
An Image transfer
reads
and
(I)
each byte exactly.
The net effect of an Image transfer is similar to,
and, in most cases, indistinguishable from an ASCII transfer.

you

selected

OUTPUT

diskette

RECORD

SIZE

data

mode

the

program

displays:

(DEFAULT=80):

a number
(1-128) representing the size of the output record.
If
In this unirespond with RETURN, the record size defaults to 80.
is
versal diskette data mode, one sector is equal to one record which
line.
to
one
equal

Type
you

FILE

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

(FILEX)

10-9

Type the output record size;

FILEX

performs the transfer

and

returns

to:

OPT

(C,

Figure 10-2

tion

L,
a

Z):

visual

representation

the execution of the

op-

in FILEX.

Z):

INPUT MODE

(A,

U)t

OPT

(C,

1 1
_DISKETTE DATA MODE

OUTPUT

(A,

FILE

NAME:

MODE

(A,

U):

lIW

I
FILE

NAME:

DISKETTE

DATA

MODE

(A,

U):

(
FILE

NAME:

FILE

OUTPUT

Figure

10-10

FILE

EXCHANGE

10-2

PROGRAM

RECORD

SIZE

Flowchart of FILEX OPT:C

(FILEX)

NAME:

(DEFAULT

80):

10.4

(0PT:D)

DELETE

deletes a single file from
select option D, the program

OPT:D

the

you

displays:

FILE

universal

diskette

directory.

NAME:

Type the file

name

the

form:

following

filnam[.ex],RXn
where:

filnam[.ex]
is

six-character or less file name plus
an
optional
extension which identifies the file to be

two-character
deleted.

is the three-character designation
of
Must be RX;
which the file is found.
drive on which the device is mounted.

,RXn

Type

10.5

the

file

OPT

(C,

LIST

DISKETTE

the

file

and

returns

device
the
identifies

the

to:

Z):

(OPT:L)

OPT:L displays
If
directory.

Type the
mounted.

deletes

FILEX

name;

listing

you
DRIVE

number
After

select

all

diskette

NUMBER:

the

drive

number,

FILEX

displays

corresponding
you

files in
the
universal
the program displays:

the

option L,

type

the

which
a

diskette
the
table similar

is
to

following:
RESERVED

USED

DATE

73
73
576

ASCZ
IBMZ

73
73
576
73
193

03-JUN-76
03-JUN-76
03-JUN-76
03-JUN-76
03-JUN-76

<EMPTY>

910

(EMPTY)

<EMPTY>

0
0
0
0
O

0
0
0
0
0
0

NAME

IMAGE
ASCII

IBM

<EMPTY>
(EMPTY)
<EMPTY>

<EMPTY>

73
193

FILE

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

(FILEX)

10-11

<EMPTY>

0
0

(EMPTY)

<EMPTY>

0
0
0
0

0
0
0

(EMPTY)

0
0

where:
is

NAME

either

the

file

name

designation

for

empty

area.

RESERVED

is either the number of sectors reserved for a file
or
the
number
of sectors available for additional files.
There is space for a total of 19 files using a total of
1898 sectors.

USED

the

number

DATE

the

creation date

then

FILEX

OPT

returns

(C,

10.6

EXIT

OPT:X

returns

10.7

ZERO

OPT:Z

for

OPT
A

zeroed

rectory.
any

files

the

used

by the file.

file.

Z):

the

COS—310

Monitor.

(OPT:Z)

(clears)

files.

the

actually

to:

control

DISKETTE

zeroed

sectors

(OPT:X)

zeros

new

Type

If
DRIVE

you

universal

entire
select

option

diskette and makes
it
the program displays:

ready

NUMBER:

corresponding to the drive on which the diskette
When zeroing is completed, FILEX returns to:

number

mounted.

(C,

Z):

universal diskette has
This
reserves
1898
can

using

OPT:D

10-12

FILE

transferred

one

this

FILEX.

EXCHANGE

PROGRAM

file

sectors

(FILEX)

diname entry
(DATA) in the
Before
(the entire diskette).

diskette,

DATA

must

deleted

10.8

FILEX ERROR MESSAGES

The most common error message is a return
caused
by inputting an answer, usually a

Check

mat.

the

format of

your

answer

and

Message

BAD

file

the

This

options.

name,

the

wrong

is
for—

retry.

Explanation

DIRECTORY

to reference or store a file
on
a
device
without
a
or
on a device
directory
where the directory has been destroyed.
Only
devices with directories can be used.
If the
directory is damaged, call your Software Spe—

Attempted

cialist.
DEVICE

system failed in an
write
to a device.
Check for media problem

ERROR

The
or

check
FILE

ALREADY

EXISTS

for

from
attempt to read
Retry the operation.
or
(use PIP OPT— R),
hardware problem.

file name already on the
entered
in
response

was

universal
to

the

diskette

output

The system
returns
message.
Start the option
D,
L, X, Z):
(C,
again and use a unique file name.

NAME:

FILE

OPT

sequence

source output
file exceeds 16 blocks;
The
file
too large for device.
output
it
then
can
and
system outputs as much as

COS—310

FULL

IBM

the error
Use larger de—
message.
reduce the size of output, or determine
the loss is worth the change.

displays
vice,
if
ILLEGAL

information contains
a
device
in
agreement with the logical
unit information.
indevice
Stipulate new
formation.

The file
that
is

DEVICE

INSUFFICIENT

SPACE

name

not

DEVICE
are
allocate more segments than
Either allocate fewer
a
device.
or
available,
segments
segments, make more
device.
use
a larger

END

Attempted

available

end—of-file mark in the
the input file.

05/8

input

file.

(FILEX)

10-13

Correct

FILE EXCHANGE PROGRAM

Explanation

Message

is available for the file in the outdevice directory (OS/8, IBM).
Delete to
make space or use
device
with
a
directory

ROOM

room

put

space.
NOT

ENOUGH

ROOM

FOR

SYSTEM AND

FILES

Designated
files.
on

NOT

one

The

FOUND

tem

NOT

UNIVERSAL

TOO

LARGE

SYNTAX

TOO

BIG

10-14

ERROR

DISKETTE?

device

both

comodate

Use

PIP

device

and

that

the
OPT—

too

small

system
program
E to put system

files

ac—

and

the

program

another.

The
sys—
input file name was not found.
Check the directory
displays FILE NAME:

the name of
name.found in

file

for

the

a device
universal
floppy.
iversal floppy.

Requested

The number of
ceeded 4095.

file
is
file.

The

containing
formatted

the

system.

Enter

directory.
not
contain
device with un—

that

does

Request

segments

ments

logical unit

logical unit
assign—
Reformat the
incorrectly.
the

It
too
exceeds
The record is
large.
or
for
source
file
characters
output
Reduce
characters for data file output.
size of the record.

FILE EXCHANGE PROGRAM

(FILEX)

ex—

120
510
the

PATCH

PROGRAM

(PATCH)

fix

(patch) either a system program or the Monitor on
All input information for the PATCH operation is
distributed as official patches from
Digital
Corporation.
Equipment
No other informainformation is a line-by—line dialogue.
The
patch

PATCH
a

CHAPTER

used

COS-310

tion

system.

should

used.

(files) and the Monitor consist of blocks of numerical
information coded into machine language instructions and stored on the
These machine language instructions are numbered
from
system device.
0
to 377 octal.
PATCH reads one of these blocks, allows you to exam—
ine and/or change individual words within the block,
and
writes
the
block back out to the system device.
System programs

11.1

PATCH

execute

RUN

PROCEDURES

OPERATING

PATCH,

type:

PATCH[,cmndfl] [/C]

where:

,cmndfl

previously

command

stored

file

PATCH

commands.

Each

separate line;

there can be no blank
lines or comments.
When the
command
file
is
option
PATCH
reads
a
line from the command file
specified,
each time one of the following prompts is displayed:
FILE

NAME:

BLOCK:

LOCATION:
NEW

VALUE:

RELATIVE

After
or

from

the

last

error

CHECKSUM:

line of the command file has
been
is
encountered, all responses must

used
come

keyboard.

11-1

changes the blocks

the

After

the

RUN

PATCH

PATCH V8.00
FILE

/C option,

PATCH

patching

system device.

displays:
OPTION

the

displays:

program

(or current version number)

The

name

you enter

patch for

printed

file

provided by

DIGITAL:

patched.
the

Monitor.

The

responds

system

MONITOR.

indicate

EXIT

file

the

indicate

PATCHING

TO UPDATE

NAME:

Respond with the following information

operation

CHECKSUM CORRECT--USE

command,

Without
/C,
but does not
When run without

system device.

the

simulates
the
change the file on the

PATCH

the end of the PATCH-operation.
The
and control returns to the Monitor.

name

/N,

PATCH

message

displays:

BLOCK:

END

with either
to indicate

the

block

Answer

the

number

that

number

corresponding

typed,

blocks

the

are

program

block

within

file,

patched.

displays:

LOCATION:
to
corresponding
Respond with either the number
patched, or END to indicate that no more locations

location
OLD

number

VALUE:

typed,

the

program

are

location
to

displays:

nnnn

where:

nnnn

This

display requires
NEW

11-2

the

old
no

(current)

input

VALUE:

PATCH

PROGRAM

(PATCH)

and

value
is

the

followed

location.

by:

patched.

the new value as indicated
The program displays:

Enter
TAL.

the

information

supplied by

DIGI—

LOCATION:

with

Answer

patched,
If

END

either

the

END

indicate

typed,

RELATIVE

the

number

corresponding

that

program

are

patched.

displays:

CHECKSUM:

Enter the checksum from the information supplied by
checksum is correct, the program displays either:
NEW

location

locations

PATCHED

BLOCK

DIGITAL.

this

CHECKSUM
The

CORRECT—-USE

OPTION

UPDATE

been accurately entered.
to
Use option
C
the
update
Once
the program is updated it cannot be changed except by
another PATCH routine.
asks
Following the OK statement, the
program
for another block number where patching is to be done:

patch has

program.

BLOCK:
If
no
more
If further patching information is available, enter it.
Following END the program
patching information is provided, type END.
displays the number (nn) of blocks patched within the file:
nn

BLOCK(S)

PATCHED

With this statement
be patched.

Enter

FILE

NAME:

the

file

name

the

THIS

program

FILE

requests the

supplied by

DIGITAL.

name

another

patching

file

complete,

eliminated

type /X.

Following /X,

the

program

displays:

EXIT

COS

11.2

Much

with

MONITOR V

8.00

(or current version number)

ERROR CORRECTION

of the seriousness of errors while
the use of the command file option.

patching

can

PATCH PROGRAM

(PATCH)

11-3

CTRL/U

11.2.1

is
the checksum statement an error
and PATCH will return to the FILE
NAME question.
During the PATCH operation, the DELETE key is
inoperIf you make an error on a line, type CTRL/U and the correct inable.
formation.
If

any time

(Restart)

discovered,

11.2.2

prior to

the

(for

type

end

Restart)

Wrong Old Value

The old value displayed by the program must be the
same
as
old
the
value supplied in the PATCH information.
If it is not, go through the

following procedure.
Step 1

sure

the

FILE

that

letter
everything previously typed is
perfect.
number
was
R
and restart at
BLOCK
wrong
typed, type
in
NAME.
If the wrong LOCATION was typed, type
RETURN

answer

specified.

NEW

VALUE.

Type

the

This makes no change to the location
location number in answer to L0—

correct

CATION.

If everything typed was correct, check the version
the Monitor or the system program in question.

Step 2

Step 3

everything

save

error

seems

output

and

in order
consult

but
your

the

dialogue doesn't

Software

agree,

Specialist.

Bad Checksum

11.2.3

all

number

the

checksum

detected,

the

following

message

is dis—

played:
BAD

CHECKSUM
LOCATION:

faulty block is

The

newly changed block is still in memory.
locations to see if they are correct.

the

and

then

type

found,

type

11-4

not

written

the

system device.

The

numbers
and
is found, fix
END to the LOCATION:
If an
error
is
not
message.
restart the program and patch the entire block again.

PATCH PROGRAM

(PATCH)

the
Review
the error

11.3

Most

for

PATCH ERROR MESSAGES

Check
each
messages result from incorrect entries.
entry
All entries must be exactly as supplied by DIGITAL.
accuracy.
error

Message

BAD

Explanation

CHECKSUM

attempt

the

write

Type

which
block
and restart

program.

Attempted

BAD NUMBER

number

with either

nondigit,
Enter

BLOCK

made

to reference or store a file
on
a
device with a damaged or nonexistent directory.
Only files with directories can be used.
If
the
is
call
damaged,
your
directory
Software Specialist.

DIRECTORY

BAD

was

incorrectly patched.

was

the

number

4
than
8
or
9
digits
more

digits,
was

typed.

correctly.

It can—
incorrect block number was typed.
file
be
than
the
of
the
larger
length
block
Enter
the
correct
patched.
being
number.

TOO BIG

not

FILE

NOT

LOCATION

CHANGE

file was not found on the system
device.
for the file name.
If
Check
the
directory
the file name is not found, check for correct
version number.

FOUND

The

TOO

BIG

BLOCK

no
made to write a block with
it.
Make
changes
proper changes using
patch information.

location
than
greater
number.
location
Retype
An

attempt

377

was

typed.

was

PATCH PROGRAM

(PATCH)

11-5

CHAPTER 12
BOOT

BOOT

if
is

is
the

run

12.1

bootstrap the
has
been moved
system
to start the system on
used

PROGRAM

(BOOT)

system from
from

the

one

type

device

another, i.e.,
another, boot

device.

new

BOOT OPERATING PROCEDURES

execute

RUN

BOOT,

type:

BOOT/xx

where:

/xx

the

12.2

designation
operation.

want

/DK

the

RKOS

disk

/RX

the

RXOl

diskette

unit

/DY

the

RXOZ

diskette

unit

to bootstrap a device which
produce unpredictable results.

attempt

will

for

the

device

which

not

ready

does

not

exist

BOOT ERROR MESSAGES

Explanation

Message

two—character
to get into

you

device or an
device
illegal
designation was
Control
returns
to
the
Monitor.
specified.
a
device
legal
designation.
Specify
N0

CHAPTER 13
LINE

(LINCHG)

Change Program (LINCHG) is a utility program which temporari—
changes the lines-per-page configuration of printed programs with—
Its
use
affecting the SYSGEN lines-per-page default value of 66.

ly
out

limited

13.1

PROGRAM

Line

The

CHANGE

printers without

LINCHG OPERATING

execute

LINCHG,

forms

hardware.

PROCEDURES

type:

LINCHG[/n]

RUN

where:
is

the

number

use

the

/n option,

/n
If

you do

not

HOW MANY

LINES

PER

Type the number

(1-99)

fied

the

The

number

lines

the

you want

program

page.

displays:

PAGE?

lines

number

you

want.

LINCHG

lines-per—page.

installs

The

this speci—
system defaults to

lines—per-page.
LINCHG number will remain
is made, the system is

LINCHG

effect

rebooted,

a
call
to
unless
further
the system is closed down.

Example:
of
66
is a batch program with a SYSGEN default
lines-perLine change commands change the lines-per—page of various pro-

Following
page.
grams.

13-1

.RUN

JOBl

.RUN

LINCHG/10

.RUN

JOB2

.RUN

LINCHG/33

.RUN

JOB3

.RUN

LINCHG/99

JOB4
LINCHG
HOW MANY LINES
.RUN

;66 lines-per—page.
;10 lines—per-page.

:33 lines-per-page.
;99

lines-per-page.

.RUN

PER PAGE?

50
.RUN

JOBS

.RUN

LINCHG/66

The above
with
the

:50

lines-per—page.

example shows how

default
variety of changes for the
default
The
the
number.
by rebooting the system.

13.2

normal

LINCHG

ERROR

series of programs may be
run
starting
the first program, then incorporating a
finishing with
programs which follow, and
a

for

lines-per-page

reestablished

Explanation
to
Attempted
with
printer

cannot

13-2

also

MESSAGES

Message

INVALID OPERATION

can

LINE CHANGE PROGRAM

(LINCHG)

made.

change
forms

lines-per-page
hardware.

Such

on
a

change

CHAPTER 14
FORMAT

PROGRAMS

(DKFMT, DYFMT)

it
used
on
RK05 disk or an RX02 diskette can be
COS-310,
initialized.
Initialization consists of formatting the disks.
Do not initialize a disk or diskette containing any important informaInitialization destroys
tion such as the Monitor or other such files.
the data on the disk.
Before

must

Formatting the RK05
marks

sense

onto

and RX02 means writing the
and
necessary
timing
the disk or diskette and erasing any other informa-

tion.
An

RXOl

diskette

procedure
formatted

14.1

The

can

formatted

be reversed.
cannot
to be used on an RXOl

FORMATTING RK05

format

RK05

RUN

DKFMT

The

an
RX02
diskette.
diskette does not need

become

RXOl

This
be

drive.

DISKS

disk,

type:

displays:

program
DKMFT

8.00

DRIVE?

Respond with the number
After

type

you
ARE

YOU

this

(0—3)

number

the

drive

following

where

message

the disk is
mounted.
is displayed:

SURE?

Any response other than Y (Yes) brings back the DRIVE?
(Yes) response causes the program to display:
WRITE
READ

question.

A Y

PASS
PASS

14-1

These

phrases indicate

two

that

the program

operation;

they

re-

Some time (a matter of seconds)
response from the keyboard.
the
that
elapses after each phrase appears while
program
completes
particular phase of operation.

quire

When

the

formatting operation

complete,

the

program

another

disk.

Time

displays:

DRIVE?

This

cue

begin formatting

the

physical
changing of disks.
CTRL/C to return to the Monitor.

FORMATTING RX02

14.2

format

RUN

DYFMT

The

program
DYFMT

RX02

the

formatting

is
is

allowed

for

complete,

type

DISKETTES

diskette,

type:

displays:
8.00

DRIVE?

Respond with the number
The

program
ARE

YOU

(0-1)

the drive

where

the

disk

mounted.

displays:
SURE?

Any response other than Y (Yes) brings back the
(Yes) response causes the program to display:
FORMATTING

DRIVE

question.

where:

the

remains
formatting is

This

statement

When

the

number
on

the

(0-1)

screen

completed,

the

drive

until

previously

formatting
program displays:

indicated.

completed.

DRIVE?

This

for

the

Time
is
a cue
to begin formatting another diskette.
If the formatting
physical changing of the diskettes.

pleted, type CTRL/C

14-2

FORMAT PROGRAMS

return

the

(DKFMT, DYFMT)

Monitor.

allowed
is com-

CHAPTER 15
DUMP AND

FIX

TECHNIQUE

(DAFT)

Dump and Fix Technique (DAFT) program is similar in function to an
but
it
is used for data records.
DAFT allows you to search
editor,
and to
list records
or parts of
for,
examine, and
change records,

The

records

the

printer

the

screen.

one
input and one output file to be open at the same time.
files can be the same file when in UPDATE mode.
Memory alrecord
from
the
file
contains
a
known
as
the
ways
input
current record.
The current record can be modified by the CHANGE com—
An output file
is
not
mand before being written on the output file.
needed if records from the input file are only being examined.

DAFT

allows

These

two

15.1

DAFT

the

Because

these
DAFT

COMPILING PROCEDURE

two
can

source

.SAVE

source

binary

file

files,
before

DAFT

DAFT OPERATING

execute
RUN

DIBOL
one

COMP,DAFTA,DAFTB

.RUN

15.2

two
program is distributed as
files must be compiled into
To compile DAFT, type:
executed.
DAFT

DAFT,

PROCEDURES

type:

DAFT[,cmndf11...,cmndfl7]

where:

cmndfl1...,cmndfl7
are

previously
be

used

command files
the keyboard.

which contain DAFT commands
data file.
If the optional
are not present,
commands are entered via
After the last command in the last
file
stored

dump

files
fix a

15-1

is executed, additional commands can be entered through
is displayed to indicate
An asterisk (*)
the keyboard.
that the DAFT program is ready for a command.

15.3

DAFT COMMAND

FILE

file is created with the COS editor and contains DAFT com—
The entries in the command file are ordered accordin
to a se—
To
create
an
effective
quence of needs within individual records.
command file you must know the contents of the record and the possible
areas needing correction.

The

command

mands.

15.4

DAFT COMMANDS

The first word in a DAFT command is a keyword consisting of any number
of
nonblank characters, only the first of which is significant.
Some
commands involve both a keyword and arguments.
These
are
arguments
separated from each other and from the keyword by one or more spaces.

15.4.1

in DAFT Commands

Used

Symbols

represents

optional

unsigned
in

nonzero

command

positive integer.

and

omitted,

n=l

If it
is as—

sumed.

<a,b>

a
key field of character positions a through
Both a and b are unsigned nonzero posi—
inclusive.
If
tive integers and b must not be
smaller
than
a.
is optional in a command and is omitted, the subthis
scripted area specified in the KEY command is used.

represents

the
indicates that before a record is read from
input
the current record in memory (if there is one) is
The + sign does not have a
written on the output file.
the only argument.
it
it
is
before
unless
space

file,

data

represents

piece

data.

form:

‘characters...'
Numeric

[—1

15-2

data

has

the

digits...

DUMP AND FIX TECHNIQUE

(DAFT)

form:

Alphanumeric

data

has

the

Before

being

used

the
is

executing

is
command, data
key field <a,b>.

ad—

If
smaller
and
it
is
alphanumeric,
in
the field and filled with spaces on
left—justified
the right.
If data
is
smaller
and
it
is
numeric,
and filled with zeros on the left.
If
right-justified
data is larger and alphanumeric, excess
characters
on
the
are
If it is larger and numeric,
right
ignored.
excess characters on the left are
ignored.

justed
the

15.4.2

data

DAFT

Command

Summary

are

entered

after

Commands

same

length

displays

DAFT

the

asterisk

Command

(*).

Function

Advance

[n][+]

Backspace

[n]

Advances

[<a,b>]data

the

Backspaces

UPDATE

file

the
input
command.

was

current key field of
memory with the data
<a,b> is used, it
temporarily
key field specified in the key

data

If
the

specified.

records

records.

the

currently in

record

overrides

file

input
the

the

Replaces
the

with

opened
Change

statement.

Display [n]

Exit

line
of
Sets the width of the
or
device
(screen
printer) to
If n is omitted,
(maximum 130).
turns
the
grid on if it is off
off if it is on.
control to the
is open.

Returns

COS—310

the
listing
characters
this command
and turns it

Monitor

output file
Fini

[+]

Closes
the

the

input file

Goto

Help

n[+]

are

first
data

DATE,

the

Makes

record

must

the

summary

DUMP AND

specified,

remainder of the
to
the
output
copied
to a file Opened for UP-

record

write

file.

Displays

file.

output

current

and

the

specified.
current

record.

commands.

DAFT

FIX TECHNIQUE

(DAFT)

15-3

Function

Command

Input filnam[/logica1 unit #]
Opens the

specified

record
first
record.

read

The
for
file
input.
and becomes the current

the key to character
inclusive.

Sets

Key a,b

b
List

[n][<a,b>][+]

Prints

positions

through

consecutive records
with
beginning
record.
The subscript <a,b> rep—
are
resents the consecutive characters
that
to be considered.

the

current

Output filnam[/logical unit #]
Opens the specified file for output.
Put

In]

Writes

memory

onto

copies
the

the

output

record
file.

currently
and

Displays the names of the
input
files, the units where the files

Query

are

Reopens the
the

comes

Type

[<a,b>]data[+]

[n][<a,b>][+]

input

current

file.
The
record.

first

output

located,

the

ver-

record

be—

the record currently in memory, and
sion number of the DAFT program.

Rewind

Searches the current record and then succeed—
for an occurrence of the specirecords
ing
fied data appearing in the key field.
Same as List
the screen.

except output

displayed

Update filnam[/logical unit #]
This
Opens the specified file for updating.
command can only be specified for a file with

fixed-length
is

used

the

since
records.

records

move

version

number

direct

access

1/0

Version

Displays

Write

function
Performs the same
as
Advance
[n]
The nth record after the current record
[+].
becomes the new current record.

[n]

DAFT.

of
the
and
size
Outputs the record number
record
on the output device
current
(either
on
the
whether
printer depending
was output by a Type or
List DAFT
The printer is the initial
command).
output

screen

last

record

device.

15-4

DUMP AND FIX TECHNIQUE

(DAFT)

DAFT OUTPUT

15.5

lines
The grid has two
Records can be listed with a grid above them.
The lower of the two
which show the character positions.
numbers
The upper line
lines represents the ones digits of the column counts.
the
The
tens
are
tens
digits
printed for the first
represents
digits.
and last column in the record (or part of the record) or whenever
the
If there is a hundreds digit, it is printed in
tens digit increments.

column 1

Following
,R

whenever

example

increments.
of

DAFT

program

operation.

DAFT

*HELP

ADVANCE

N+

BACKSPACE

CHANGE

<A,B>

DATA

DISPLAY N
EXIT
FINI

GOTO N+
HELP

LABEL/UNIT

INPUT
KEY

A,B

LIST

KEY+

LABEL/UNIT

OUTPUT
PUT N

QUERY
REWIND

SEARCH
N

<A,B> DATA
<A,B>+

UPDATE

LABEL/UNIT

TYPE

VERSION
WRITE

X
*VERSION
DAFT VERSION 8.00
*INPUT MAILING/l
*DISPLAY
*T

RECORD

000001

DIGITAL

146

FILE

EQUIPMENT CORP.
MAIN

RECORD LENGTH=140

MAILNG,
D.

12-3

PAVLOCK
MAYNARD

ST.

CHARACTERS

0012345All

MA01754OS/8-l

*D
*T

RECORD

000001

FILE

MAILNG,

RECORD

LENGTH=140

CHARACTERS

DUMP AND FIX TECHNIQUE

(DAFT)

15-5

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT CORP.

PAVLOCK

12-3
1

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
146 MAIN.
ST.

RECORD

000002

MAYNARD

MA01754OS/8-l

FILE

RECORD LENGTH=140

MAILNG,

0012345All

CHARACTERS

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
K. RICHER
12-3
EQUIPMENT CORP.

DIGITAL

1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
146 MAIN ST.
MA01754COS 300 0001972T
*T

MAYNARD

2<25,50>

RECORD

000002

FILE

MAILNG,

RECORD

LENGTH=140

CHARACTERS

RECORD

LENGTH=140

CHARACTERS

RECORD

LENGTH=140

CHARACTERS

3
4
5
56789012345678901234567890
K.

RICHER

RECORD

000003

FILE

MAILNG,

3
4
5
56789012345678901234567890
S.

*A 1
*KEY
*T

RABINOWITZ

1,50

RECORD

000004

FILE

MAILNG,

12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
DIGITAL

RECORD

000005 OF

FILE

RECORD

MAILNG,

LARY

LENGTH=140
4

CHARACTERS
5

12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
DEC

15-6

DUMP AND

FIX

TECHNIQUE

WELCOME

(DAFT)

*Q
INPUT

FILE:

UNIT:

OUTPUT

MAILNG

FILE:

OPEN

/NONE/

UNIT:

KEY=<001,050>
000005 OF

RECORD

DAFT VERSION

15.6

DAFT

FILE

MAILNG,

LENGTH=14O

RECORD

8.00

ERROR MESSAGES

Message

BAD

Explanation

DIGIT

DATA

other
than
is
contained

digits

Change

bad

Remove
CANT

BACKSPACE

PAST

BEGIN

file.
the
BACKSPACE

WITH

INPUT

FILE

EXTRA

GRID

SIZE

CHARS

ILLEGAL

RECORD

backspace past
in

the

file

CLOSING

becomes

backspace with sequential
only
possible when file is

input.

up-

mark
end—of—file
This is not necessarily
nnnn was
last
record
read.
the
file is closed.
Reopen the file.
to

read

past the

input file.

the

error.

The

input

The

grid

than

130

(printer width)
characters.

may

not

Reduce

the

greater

grid size.

characters were found after the
command.
Remove extra characters.

Extra

beginning

the

nnnn

sign
field.

data

mode.

Attempted

EXCESSIVE

character

minus

INPUT

SEQUENTIAL

RECORD

numeric

first record
record.

current

date
OF

characters.

The

Attempted
Backspace

END

command,

FILE

Attempted

CANT

CHARACTERS

end

FILE

The

file

(one

being updated contains
the

not

fixed—length
files.

The

size

bad

record

I).

Only

records are
permitted
file is closed.
ReOpen

the

such
file.

(DAFT)

15-7

same

DUMP AND FIX TECHNIQUE

Explanation

Message

KEY

ENTIRELY

PAST

END OF

RECORD

The key specified in a List or Type DAFT command
began with a character greater than the
record size.
Reduce the size of the key.
KEY

EXTENDS

PAST RECORD END

Attempted

KEY

TOO

end

Data

LABEL

The

FILE

NAME

terminated

100

FILE

ALREADY

OPEN

command

does

have

not

The

file

name

PUT,

UPDATE

PUSHDOWN

OVERFLOW

0 NOT ALLOWED

command

requires

input

file.

request

was

made

command

but

output file

The

not

writing
file.

open

the

Open

one

terminated
an

output

Only

current

file

output
The
is
request
the current output file beone

file.
file
with

the

FINI

be made when the
output
The output file can be closed
command or CTRL/C.

The

program will abort with this message
Restart DAFT.
many errors are made.

when

too

The

EXIT

cannot

open.

Don't

15-8

the

omitted in an
OUT—
INPUT,
command.
Implement a name.

Close
ignored.
opening a new

STILL OPEN

Reduce

was

fore
FILE

such a case,
the end of the

input file.

one was already open.
while
file can be open at a time.

OUTPUT

extends
a
list

specified in a CHANGE
Specify required data.

However,

characters.

open.
the point just prior to
record
on
the
output
file.

OUTPUT

that

key

not

was

Open

The
is

NO OUTPUT FILE

record.

key is possible.

command.
INPUT

The key exceeded
size of key.

BIG

NO DATA

change with

the
with such
the
list
record.

past

DUMP AND PIX TECHNIQUE

(zero)
use

(DAFT)

not

permissible

argument.

CHAPTER 16
REPORT

which describes
duces

the

(PRINT)

creation of report programs.
the report, PRINT generates a

the

eases

PROGRAM GENERATOR

Using
DIBOL

command
which

program

file
pro-

report.

reads
and
The first program
is two programs chained together.
If no
validates the command file while creating memory table entries.
the
the
second
command file errors are detected,
program
produces
The two programs which generate the report pro—
DIBOL report program.
gram require a total of 16K bytes of memory.

16.1

distributed

piled into
The

PRINT
o
0

two

before

files

contain

PRINTl,
PRINT3,

PRINT2

PRINT4,

parsing

PRINT7,
the

several

programs

source

the
0

PROCEDURE

COMPILING

are

.RUN

com—

following

information:

data sections.
PRINT6 are the procedure
and validating) phase.

the

sections

PRINTS,

PRINTO

are

the

procedure sections

generation phase.

the following procedure
files into binary programs.

Use

the

files.
The files must
be executed.

can

PRINTS,

(reading

PRINTB,

source

compile

the

distributed

source

COMP,PRINT1,PRINTZ,PRINT3,PRINT4,PRINT5,PRINT6

.SAVE PRINTA
.RUN COMP,PRINT1,PRINT2,PRINT7,PRINT8,PRINT9,PRINTO
.SAVE PRINTB

16-1

16.2

PRINT OPERATING PROCEDURES

execute

PRINT,

type:

PRINTA+PRINTB,cmndfl[/Xy]

RUN

where:
cmndfl

the

name

previously

stored

command

file.

PRINTA+PRINTB
the

are

switch which determines whether
be
on the printer;
listed
means list.

the

both

are

the

switch which determines whether

file)

the

programs.

(data

and

DIBOL

is
is

compiled

created

printer;
the

by executing

means

switches

and

list,

their

command

means

file

list,

DIBOL
program
is to be listed
L means list.
PRINT

preceding

slash

can

must

omitted.
The output from the RUN PRINT command is a data
file
converted to a source file with the use of FILEX.

16.2.1

Use

the

FILEX

which

Creation of Source File

the following FILEX command sequence
data
file
created by PRINT.
(See

create

Chapter 10

source

for

file
from
informa—

FILEX

tion.)
.RUN FILEX
FILEX V 8.00

OPT

(c,

MODE

FILE

NAME:

OUTPUT

MODE

FILE

NAME:

OPT

(c,

Pronam

in the

16-2

INPUT

Z):

(A,

U):

$RPG/logica1 unit #
(A,

U):

pronam
L, x, Z):

is any name desired, but it is usually
IDENT line of the command file.

REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR

(PRINT)

the

same

name

used

16.2.2

Compilation

compile the DIBOL source
put through FILEX, type:
To

.RUN

created

by running the

out—

COMP,pronam

.SAVE

16.2.3

program

pronam

Program Execution

the

execute
.RUN

compiled

DIBOL

program,

type:

pronam

where:

pronam

the

name

compiled
The

execution of

16.3

The

this

PRINT COMMAND

Print Command

END

IDENT

FILE

has

six

sections:

the program and author
page headings for the report
describes the input file
describes any computation to be done
describes the report column headings
is an optional directive at the end of
Command File

and

FILEX

provides

INPUT
COMPUTE

form

identifies

IDENT

The

created

produces the report.

program

File

HEAD1,HEAD2

16.3.1

of the source program
Section 16.2.2

the

generat-

Section

the

IDENT

section

pronam[/logica1

is:

unit

#][,author]

where:
pronam

is the
ed.

name

the

DIBOL

source

program

/logical unit#
is

the

number

referencing

the

storage location

the

program.

REPORT

PROGRAM

GENERATOR

(PRINT)

16-3

any text from 1

,author

characters

length.

Example:

TEST4l/l4,

IDENT

JOHN

;Program named TEST41,

DOE

:14, written by John

16.3.2

logical

unit

Doe.

HEADl and HEADZ Section

HEADl is the first heading line on each page of the report.
HEADZ
is
the second line.
HEADl and HEADZ are both optional.
The only difference between HEADl
and HEADZ is that HEADl information will be expanded
(if
space
permits)
by inserting a space between each character.
HEADZ has no such expansion capability.
The

is:

form

[HEADl

'text']

[HEADZ

'text']

where:

text

string

character

There
the

can

individual

than

texts

set,

to 132 characters
from
exclusive of single quotes.

HEADl or HEADZ
linked together.

one

are

line.

this

the

COS-310

the

case,

Example:
HEADl

'COMPUTATION AND SUMMARY RESULTS'

HEADl

'FOR AUGUST,

16.3.3

INPUT

1973'

Section

by field

consists
description lines

The

INPUT

form

section

INPUT

the

input

the

INPUT

describing

statement

the

is:

[filnam[/logical unit #]][,S]

where:
filnam

16-4

the

name

REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR

the

input

(PRINT)

fields of

file.

one

the

line

input

followed
record.

/logical unit #
is

file

the

logical unit

summarizes

,5
If

the

when

the

The

form

name

report

the

omitted,

which the

input

than

describes

the

generated

resides.

file

report.
will

program

request

run.

field

each

rather

description line is:

[fldnam],

n[.m][,Lr[P]]
D

where:
fldnam

the

is the size of the field, expressed
maximum for A field, 15 maximum for

the

field.

alphanumeric field.
numeric

field.
in
D

characters

(510

field).

is the number of decimal places
valid only for numeric fields.

,Lr

is used only for the break fields
break
field
is
(a
in
used
conjunction with ACCUMULATE to print totals).
The r is a single digit expressing the relative
impor1 indicates least important and 9
of the field;
tance
for
When totals are printed
indicates most important.
more

are

The maximum

16.3.4

starts

break

are

number

COMPUTE

optional

also

important
printed.

break,

report page

new

totals

after

the

for

the

field

This

name

all

and

lesser

totals

breaks

for

this

printed.

fields

20.

Section

section

starts

with

line

one

word:

following

form:

containing only

COMPUTE
DIBOL

statements

fldnam

appear

succeeding

lines

the

expression

REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR

(PRINT)

16-5

where:
is

fldnam

the

cate

name

any

result

expression

destination field and must not
dupliname nor any prev1ous computation

input

field

name.

any valid DIBOL expression.
phanumeric field or literal, or
is

al—
s1ngle
numeric
expressmn.
any

It may be

Unlike DIBOL, PRINT uses decimal places.
of
and
subtraction
expressions with

places.
decimal

It will not
allow
addition
different
numbers of decimal
The result of such an expression will have the same number of
places as the elements of the expression.

The number of decimal places in the result of a multiplication
sion is the sum of the decimal places in the two expressions.
The
the
the

expres—

of decimal places in the result of a division expression is
difference in decimal places between the number being divided and
divisor.

number

number of decimal places for any expression, multiply by
1.00 with the number of decimal places equal to the long—
For example, expr 1
number of decimal places in the other values.
2 places, and expr 2 no places, then
the

To-adjust
the
est

has

constant

expr

has

four

16.3.5

expr

decimal

1.00

places.

places in numeric

constants.

Section

section

decimal

allows

The

begins

with

line

containing only

one

word:

The

must

lines describe the fields to be printed (not
The form of these field descriptions is:

all

lines

input

used).

fldnam,

'text'[,A][,format]

where:

fldnam

16-6

is the name of the field
field or the result of a

REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR

(PRINT)

and

must

computation.

either

alphanumeric string of COS—310 characters delim—
This text is used as the headby single quotes.

is an
ited

'text'

ing

the

break

report columns and

is present only if the field
the
sum
is
to
be printed
must be numeric.

the

lines

total

for

fields.
is

total

and
accumulated
lines.
The field

is a string
fields.
If

format

of text showing the format for the
numeric
the format is not included, PRINT will create one using the description of the field (if this
is
an
accumulated
two
extra
field,
places will be asThat created format will
use
an
sumed).
appropriate
number
of
decimal and integer places in the following
form:

XX,XXX.XXtext used for titles may be several words separated
This centers each word over a column in separate lines.

The

asterisks.

For

example:

'GROSS*PAY'

GPAY,
will

cause

GROSS
PAY

placed

over

the

GPAY

column.

GPAY

also

break

field,

then:
GROSS

will

The

field

PAY

used

TOTAL

the

descriptor

total

line

lines may

instead

GROSS*PAY TOTAL.

also

the

form:

,An
Where

the

size of

the

field.

This will

produce

blank

columns

report.

any two field descriptors are not
then two blank columns will separate

separated by
the

fields

filler descriptor,
the report.

Example:
PRINT

NAME,
DEPT,
GPAY,

'EMPLOYEE NAME‘
'DEPARTMENT'

'GROSS*PAY',A,XX,XXX.XX

REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR

(PRINT)

16-7

16.3.6

END Section

The END
word:

section

optional

and consists of

line

containing only the

END

16.4

Most

PRINT ERROR MESSAGES

errors

file.

These

result from incorrect information in the
command
correctable with the editor and Monitor commands.

are

PRINT evaluates each statement in the command
file
for
correctness.
entire
line
error
occured and a
errors
the
where
the
Whenever
occur,
The number printed near the error message
indimessage are printed.
the character position where the error occurred.
The following
cates
error messages are used by PRINT.

Explanation

Message

ALPHA

LITERAL

ALREADY

is
Expected alphanumeric literal
Insert where appropriate.
ing.

REQUIRED

DEFINED

Attempt

name

section
previously used.
file.
COMPUTE

HEADER

TOO

The

LONG

field
with

the

name

Correct

header line exceeds 132
the command file.

the

miss—

INPUT

that was
command

characters.

Correct
IMPROPER

Filler

DEFINITION

item

incorrectly.
IMPROPER

LITERAL

IMPROPER

USE

Literal
DECIMAL

too

the

Correct

long.

the

section is used
command file.

Shorten

the

literal.

PLACES

number of decimal places exceeds the
Reduce
size of the field being defined.
the number of decimal places.

The

The size of a numeric field specified in
the
INPUT section must be between 1-15.
Correct the command file.

INTEGER FROM

1—15

16-8

PROGRAM GENERATOR

REPORT

REQUIRED

(PRINT)

Explanation

Message

INTEGER

1-132

FROM

REQUIRED

The

fields
numeric
the field size
characters.

expected

INTEGER REQUIRED

Integer missing where
and

LITERAL

TOO

MUST

IDENT

NUMERIC

MUST

first
be
file.

ITEM

The

section
IDENT.

the

File

ENDING

QUOTE

only legal option in

name

that

INPUT

DIRECTIVE

ITEMS

follows

the

de-

INPUT

the

from IDENT
command file.

missing

the

closing quote

PRINT
NO

numeric
Redefine.

comma.

Correct
NO

file
command
the
command

the

Correct

item expected to
fined incorrectly.

Insert
NAME

FILE

Check

expected.

needed.

must

statement

NEED

fewer

Field description exceeds 30 characters.
Reduce to fewer than 30 characters.

LONG

MUST

insert

out

Reduce

range.
than 132

for

statement.

The
the

INPUT

fields

or
HEADZ,
closing quote.

HEADl,

Insert

statement

command

statement.

missing.

Correct

file.

specified

are

statement.

the
command

following

Correct

the

file.
NOT

DEFINED

Attempted
been

NOT

ENOUGH

RIGHT

PARENTHESES

statement

too

few

command
PICTURE

TOO

LONG

defined.
in

field

Correct

the

COMPUTE

right parentheses.

that

not

file.

section

has

Correct

the

file.

The picture or edit
mask
for
exceeds
22 characters.
Reduce
than 22 characters.

REPORT

has

command

PROGRAM GENERATOR

printing
to

fewer

(PRINT)

16-9

Explanation

Message

Statement contains

SYNTAX ERROR

options.
TOO MANY

COLUMNS

REPORT

HEADZ,

columns

132

than

under

sections.

characters
command file.

illegal
the

Correct

HEADl,
the

Correct

command file.
TOO MANY

COMPUTE

STATEMENTS

TOO MANY DATA

ITEMS

than

section.
TOO MANY LEFT

PARENTHESES

Correct
20

TOO

MANY

LIST

RIGHT

ITEMS

PARENTHESES

complicated
Simplify

statement

file.

in
items
command

the

the
INPUT
file.

command

COMPUTE

right parentheses.

many

INPUT

file.

section
Correct

has

the

file.

section
statement.
invalid
Only
HEADl,
HEADZ,
INPUT,
COMPUTE,
IDENT,
Check
PRINT, and END are
legal.
your
for
incorrect
statements
statements;

correct

16-10

in
command

were

file.

COMPUTE
section
be
deciphered

the

than 20 list
Correct
section.

command
DIRECTIVE

too

UNKNOWN

the

PRINT.

statements

command

items

data

Correct

statement

too

COMPUTE
the

eight

than

specified.

REPORT PROGRAM GENERATOR

the

(PRINT)

command

file.

CHAPTER
FLOWCHART

The
of

flowchart

input

GENERATOR PROGRAM

generator program

(FLOW)

produces

flowchart

from

set

commands.

The flowchart is
1.
ical
unit

always written to a file named $PASSl located on log—
printed flowchart can also be produced by using the
The
flowchart
are
appropriate option switches.
generator
programs
distributed as source programs and must be compiled before use.

17.1

FLOW
To

FLOW COMPILING PROCEDURE

consists

compile

.RUN

the

several

FLOW

DIBOL

programs,

programs.

type:

FLOW

COMP,KREF

.SAVE

17.2

COMP,FLOW1,FLOW2,FLOW3,FLOW4

.RUN
.SAVE

The

KREF

FLOW OPERATING PROCEDURES

commands

execute

FLOW

have

the

RUN

FLOW,cmndf11...,cmndfl7[/xx]

RUN

SORT,KRFSRT

RUN

KREF

form:

where:

cmndfl]...,cmndfl7
are

previously

commands

/xx

one

the

stored source files containing the
used in generating a flowchart.

FLOW

following option switches:

17-1

the

lists

flowchart

the

printer.

omitted, the flowchart will only be placed
SPASSl on logical unit 1.

/L
in

is
file

indicates that the input files are DIBOL
programs
with
the
FLOW
commands imbedded in the program.
When the /P option is used, only input
lines
beginning with a semicolon followed by any number of
treated
periods followed by a space or a tab are
as
FLOW
commands.
No semicolon
period
space
are
configuration is needed if the FLOW commands

—

not

part of

DIBOL

—

program.

KRFSRT

is a special sort
command
file
sort
the
that
will
KRFSRT is distributed as
cross-reference scratch file.
part of the COS-310 software.

KREF

cross-reference DIBOL program that works
specifi—
FLOW.
This produces a cross—reference table
an alphabetical
labels
used
listing of all
in
the
flowchart, the page number where each label is
defined, and the page numbers where each label is used.
KREF is distributed as part of the COS-310 software.

cally with
containing

1
must
be
unit
2, 3, 4, and 5.
Logical
10
the
flowchart
segments
large enough
print image (usually
is sufficient).
and
5
must
be
each
large
Logical units 2, 3, 4,
to
contain
the KREF scratch file (usually 5 segments in each
enough
FLOW

units
contain

logical

uses

logical unit).

17.3

FLOW COMMANDS

Although

de—
are
FLOW commands look like DIBOL statements, they
FLOW commands have the following general
used differently.

some

fined
and
format:

[;..

][1abel][,]

command

where:
;..

label

the

FLOW

command

one

PROC
DISK
IF

17-2

used with
the
/P
commands and DIBOL

is the special indicator
distinguish between FLOW
statement

the

label.

following

FLOW

[;Jltext]
[;][text]
YES
NO

:label

[;][text]

FLOWCHART GENERATOR PROGRAM

(FLOW)

commands:

option

statements.

CALL label [;][text]
START [;][text]
STOP

[;1[text]

GOTO

label

CGOTO

labe11,labe12,...
[;][text]
TITLE [;][text]
SBTTL [7][text]
1/0

PAGE

is the information to be placed in the flowchart
block.
This text is usually centered within the
blocks.
Some commands require
a
the
text
in
format.
specific

text

Spaces and/or

17.3.1

The

inserted

for

legibility.

Command

PROC

tabs may

command

(process)

side
a
process block.
by the command line:

allows

The

you

following

put up

process

block

characters
will

in-

generated

;BUILD A TAB CHARACTER

PROC

***************
*

BUILD

TAB

CHARACTER

* ************* *

17.3.2

The

DISK Command

DISK

block.
line:

command
The

allows

you to
disk

following

put up

block

will

characters
be

inside
the

generated by

a
disk
command

:OPEN SYS FILE FOR INPUT

DISK

*************
k

*
*

OPEN

FILE

SYS
FOR

INPUT
*

*
*
*

*************

FLOWCHART

GENERATOR PROGRAM

(FLOW)

17-3

17.3.3

Command

command allows you to put up to 37 characters inside a decision
The IF command requires that the text field be preceded by the
following field:

The IF
block.

YES

:label

branch to

NO
The

decision

following
IF

NO:ERROR

block will

generated by the command line:

;IS THERE A SYS FILE?
*

*
*

THERE

*SYS

**********

ERROR

**********

FILE?*
*

*
*

17.3.4

*—--->*

YES

CALL Command

The CALL command
allows
to
put
you
a subroutine
block.
The CALL command
preceded by the subroutine name.
The

block

following subroutine
HOF

CALL

will

;OUTPUT PAGE MARKER

HOF

*************
*

OUTPUT
*

PAGE
*

MARKER
*

*********

17-4

FLOWCHART GENERATOR PROGRAM

inside
33
characters
that the text field be

generated by the command

*********
*

requires

(FLOW)

line:

17.3.5

START Command

The

command allows you to put up
The following start block will

START

block.

START

characters

generated by

inside a start
the command line:

;HOF ROUTINE
*************
*

HOF

ROUTINE

*************

17.3.6

The

STOP Command

command

STOP

block.

The

allows

you

following

put up
block

stop

will

inside
generated by the

characters
be

stop

command

line!
STOP

;RETURN
************
*

RETURN
************

17.3.7

GOTO Command

The

command allows you to put up
The following GOTO block will

GOTO

block.

GOTO

six

generated by

characters inside a
the command

GOTO

line:

NEXT
**********
—————————

**********

FLOWCHART GENERATOR PROGRAM

(FLOW)

17-5

CGOTO Command

17.3.8

The

CGOTO

(computed GOTO)
text

field

spaces.
lines:

The

branches.
out

The

imbedded

command

allows
to
flowchart
multiway
you
consists of labels separated by commas withthe
by
following blocks will be generated

;BRANCH BASED ON COMMAND NUMBER
PROCES,DISK,IF,SUBR

PROC
CGOTO

***************
*

*BRANCH BASED

COMMAND

NUMBER

***************
**********

---------

—————————

DISK

**********

1
1

**********

l
1

PROCES

**********

—————————

SUBR

**********

17.3.9

The

I/O

Command

inside
an
I/O command allows you to put up to 47 characters
I/O
The following I/O block will be generated by the command line:

block.

I/O

;DISPLAY

'ERROR'

************

DISPLAY
*

'ERROR'

************

17.3.10

The TITLE
flowchart

TITLE

Command

command
title.

allows you to specify
up
The title will appear at

pages.

17-6

FLOWCHART GENERATOR PROGRAM

(FLOW)

characters

the

top of all subsequent

17.3.11

SBTTL Command

The SBTTL command allows you to specify up to 40
title.
The
subtitle
is
printed on the line
SBTTL command implies a top—of-page command.

17.3.12

PAGE

The

command

PAGE

command

17.4

advances

unnecessary

The

the

most

to the top
of
the
next
page.
pages when necessary, making the PAGE

listing
new

instances.

FLOW EXAMPLE

best

The

sub—

Command

automatically generates

FLOW

characters as a
the title.

below

FLOW

FLOWZ,

example

the

use

commands

have

been

FLOW3,

FLOW4).

the

inserted

produce

flowchart
into the

generator
FLOW

flowchart

source

FLOW,

FLOW

itself.

files

(FLOWl,

the

follow-

use

ing procedure:
0

o
0

17.5

Assign the necessary logical units using
Compile the flowchart programs.
Enter the following commands:
.RUN

FLOW,FLOW1,FLOW2,FLOW3,FLOW4/PL

.RUN

SORT,

.RUN

KREF

KRFSRT

FLOW ERROR MESSAGES

Explanation

Message

INPUT

ERROR

DFU.

FLOW

has

Build

error

where

the
the

no
information
command file.

has

the

build

flowchart.

of
The
line
text
will be displayed on
the
line
and
correct

occurred.

error

line.

occurred

Check

error.

FLOWCHART GENERATOR PROGRAM

(FLOW)

17-7

CHAPTER 18
MENU

The

viously

PROGRAM

program allows you to
created command file.

(MENU)

select
MENU

and

execute

permits

commands

from

pre-

orderly execution of

commands.

MENUWOPERATING PROCEDURES

18.1

run

MENU,

RUN

type:

MENU , cmnd f l

where:
cmndfl

name of
the MENU
device.
If none is
buffer is used.

the

tem

command

file

specified,

stored

the

sys-

file

the

edit

the

the
command
displays the text found in the Display Section of
file
and
will accept a six-character operator response at the screen
The
is
location specified in the Accept Section.
operator
response
to the list of valid responses specified in the Command Seccompared
tion.
If a match is found, the corresponding Monitor or
editor
commands are then executed by COS-310.
MENU

18.2

be included
file.

can

the

COMMAND

batch

command

file

only

the

last

command

FILE

is
The MENU command file is created using COS—310 editor commands and
It consists of three sections:
stored on the system device.
Display,
file
is
The order of these sections within the
Command, and Accept.
vital.

18-1

Example:
DISPLAY

COPY COPY RXO
DIR

Rxl

DIRECTORY

RXO

COMMAND
COPY

=ER

RXO

RXl

=WR

SCOPY/Y

=PLEASE

MOUNT DISKETTE

DRIVE

PIP.$COPY
=DE SCOPY/S
=R

MENU,cmndfl
=DI,RXO
=R MENU,cmndfl
ACCEPT (24,10)
=R

DIR

Display Section

18.2.1

The

Display Section
DISPLAY

has

the

form:

[/N]

text

where:
DISPLAY

the

first

statement

the

command

file

(must

DISPLAY).

the
screen
optional switch to suppress clearing
is
to
the
text.
Without
the
screen
/N
prior
displaying
an

cleared.
text

to display on the screen beginning on line one.
line of text begins with a new line number.
If a
disline of text contains more characters than can be
played on a screen line, the extra characters are lost.
a
Any line beginning with a semicolon is assumed to be
comment and is not displayed.

text

Each

18-2

PROGRAM

(MENU)

18.2.2

The

Command Section

Section has

Command

the

form:

first

line

COMMAND

code=command

where:
COMMAND

code

is an operator response that contains a maximum of
six
characters.
The
Section
Command
contain up to
may
sixty codes.

command

the

series

18.2.3

editor command that is
code is entered as the
or

executed

operator

between

tabs

the

be
executed
the
by
listing
subsequent lines with no code to the left
The series of commands is
combined
sign.

produce

batch

cannot

longer

There may
Section.

(must be COMMAND).

commands may

commands
on
of the equal

file

section

There can be no spaces
and the command.

response.

equal sign

the

COS-310 Monitor or
its corresponding

when

many

command file.
This
than one block.
as

3995

characters

batch

command

the

Command

Accept Section

The Accept
ACCEPT

Section

has

(y,x)

[/N]

the

form:

first

line

where:
ACCEPT

the

section

(must be ACCEPT).

decimal number (cannot be an expression) designatthe screen line number where the operator response
of
number
If y is greater than the
is to be entered.
lines on the screen the results are unpredictable.
is

ing

MENU PROGRAM

(MENU)

18-3

an
decimal number (cannot be
repreexpression)
screen
column
number where the operator
the
reIf x plus the operator
response is to be entered.
screen
than
the
of
is
(maximum
six)
greater
sponse
width, the results are unpredictable.

senting

prior
location

(y,x)

the
screen
suppress clearing
selected command from the Com-

Section.

mand
The

optional switch to
to
executing the

may

fall

within

the

text

Section.

18.3

displayed by

Explanation
SECTION

FOUND

NOT

Accept Section

Correct
COMMAND SECTION

NOT

FOUND

DISPLAY

SECTION

NOT

FOUND

CURSOR

POSITION

illegal
requested

Correct
ILLEGAL

Command

STATEMENT

file.

the

command

file.

the

command

file.

in
file.

cursor

in
command

command

the

Section

command

file.

Section

command

Display

Correct
ILLEGAL

command

Command

Correct

position

the
file.

(or none) was
Section.
Accept

file
contains, a
Correct command

statement.

TOO MANY

The

COMMANDS

Command

Reduce
MANY

COMMANDS

FOR

CODE

The

Section

size of

series

MENU PROGRAM

(MENU)

meaningless
file.

Section.

commands

under

length.

large.

too

Command

exceeds 1 block
mand file.

18-4

Display

MENU ERROR MESSAGES

Message

TOO

the

one

Correct

code
com—

APPENDIX A

COS-310 CHARACTER SET

both source and data files, characters (alphanumeric
and
numeric)
two
in
stored
characters
word
six-bit
per
binary.
Negative
numbers are stored with the high-order bit of the low—order digit
set
the number 1234- is stored as two words in the
to
1.
For
example,
following form:
In

are

22
1

24
3

65
4

WORD

(with high-order bit on)

in
that
any
program
not made might produce
Table A-1 for a list of char-

This number is recognized as 123T.
This means
which the numeric-to—alphanumeric conversion is

negative numbers with letters.
acters

representing negative

Refer
numbers.

Table A-1
Characters

Representing Negative Numbers

Negative

Equivalent

Decimal

Octal

Number

Character

Code

-0
-1
-2

-3

S
T
U
V

-4
-5

-6
-7
—8
-9

Q
R

W
X
Y

49
50
51
52

61
62
63
64

53
54
55
56
57
58

65
66
67
70
71
72

Table A-2
COS-310 Character

Decimal
Code

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
l4
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

A-2

Octal
Code

Decimal
Character

00
01
02
03

Null

06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
l6
17
20
21

Space

23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

COS-310 CHARACTER SET

1
"

Code

32
33
34
35
36
37

Set

Octal
Code

Character

42
43

44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54

46
47
48
49

56
57
60
61
62
63
64

&
'

(
)
*

/
0
l
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:

;

<
=

38
39
40
41
42
43

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

B
D

E
F

G
H
I

J
K
M

N
o
P

Q
R

S
T

U
v
W
X
Y
Z

[
Tab

]

APPENDIX B

COS-310

source,
binary,
types of files in the COS-310 system:
Source, binary, and data files have similar strucsystem.
System files use standard 05/8 SAVE format.

There

four

are

and

data,
ture.

B.1

FILES

COS-310 SOURCE FILES

Each line in a source command file or DIBOL source file must be
input
This makes all source files look the same and
line
number.
with
a
Each input line has the following
makes them compatible with COS-310.
format:

line
number

word
count

(n)

n-l

words,

two

characters

per

The first word contains the word
with the following expression.
n

The

((number of characters

second

word

the

count

COS-310
word

for

that

line.

computed

line +1)/2)+l

statement

line

number,

0000-7777

octal

(0000-4095 decimal).
The third and successive words contain the text of the line packed two
The total characters of data per line
characters
COS-310
word.
per
does not include the two-character (l word) word count number.

3.2

COS-310 DATA FILES

the
of
file is completely devoted
to
storage
on
unit
holds
one
data
file.
Labels
data
logical
only
associated with logical units by the Monitor in
conjunction

Every block in
data.

data

Each

files are
with DIBOL

system programs.

The format of a line in a data file is similar to
the
format
line in a source file except there is no line number on a data
A

line of

text

word

count

(n)

data

file

words,

two

has

the

(number

characters

word

per

characters

The second and successive words
COS-310 characters per word.

3.3

following format:

The first word contains the word count
with the following expression:
n

for

file.

for

record

contain

that

line.

computed

+l)/2
the

text

the

line,

two

COS-310 BINARY FILES

are
file
binary
interpreted
differently
file, externally the two files are structured exactly alike.
of
That is, the binary code
for
each
line
a
DIBOL
source program is stored as a word count followed by the
interpretive code to be used by the run-time system.

Although the
the

than

3.4

contents
of

contents

data

COS-310 SYSTEM FILES

block
of
The first
All system files are stored in OS/8 SAVE format.
the file is a memory control block indicating where in memory the rest
is
of the blocks of the file are to be loaded.
Each successive block
a
256-word memory image.
See the 08/8 Software Support Manual for de—
tails.

3.5

SYSTEM DEVICE FORMAT

This label
the
first
COS—310 puts a label on all devices.
occupies
256
words
of each device;
four words are the actual label, one word
is the date, and the other words may be a bootstrap.
3-1 illustrates the layout of the Monitor portion of the system
As noted in the figure, COMP should be the first file in the
device.
The location of COMP is particularly
when
file area.
the
important
binary scratch area is to be expanded.

Figure

3-2

COS-310 FILES

BLOCK NO.

(Octal)
0

Bootstrap
1

Directory
10

Monitor
14

Editor

Overlay
20

Editor
34

Run—Time System
Loader
40

Edit Buffer
60

Run-Time System
70

Compiler Overlays
100

Binary Scratch

Area

140

Files
OF

MEDIA

COS-310

FILES

END

Figure

8-1

Monitor

Organization

8-3

is automatically put on a system device.
system device is organized as follows:

The

label

Word

directory

Contents

The

negative

The

starting block number

The link word to the next directory block
end.
There are seven directory blocks on
devices.

directory entries in this block.
for

file

ways

negative number
equals —l).

The

first

The

two

characters

name.

The

last

two

characters

name.

The

storage.
if

empty

all

multifile

(unused).

Empty
The

number

two

auxiliary

characters of

two-character

words

entry

per

(al-

name.

extension.

date.
of

the

file

Length

11-255

Repeat of 5-10 for each file.

(negative).

kinds of files is allocated on the disk
at
beginning
On an RK05
first
free block following the COS-310 system files.
for
file
available
disk, the system directory knows that the
space
storage only extends to block 4095.

Space for other
the

Access

Data

Files

are

DFU.

DFU

information

referenced

actually
for

sets

each

by their logical unit
up

logical

Handler

Drive number

Starting segment
Length in segments

3-4

Files

address

COS-310 FILES

internal
unit:

table

numbers

containing

assigned by
following

the

the specific device handler to use
drive number indicates which disk
a particular
logical
a
12-bit
indicated
The starting segment is
drive to reference.
by
the physical device space allocated for the
which
to
number
points
this
The length is the number of segments reserved for
logical unit.
logical unit.
The
for

handler

address

pointer

unit.

The

Example:
If logical unit
teenth entry in

14
the

handler
address

is assigned to a 32-block area on
table might contain the following

drive
1

the
fourinformation:

DKl,

starting segment

length

212

—40

(octal)

212-251
to
would
refer
segments
Any references to logical unit 14
The first block in segment 212 would have a label for
(octal) of DKl.

that

logical unit.

COS-310

FILES

3-5

APPENDIX

ERROR MESSAGE

INDEX

This

index will refer you to the chapters where corrective
and
backinformation is located.
Locate the error message you have enIf the message is
countered and go to the chapter referenced.
listed
‘more than once,
check the message listed with the program that you are

ground

running.

Message

SECTION NOT

ACCEPT
ALPHA

LITERAL

ALREADY

FOUND

REQUIRED

DEFINED
VALUE

Program

Refer

Chapter 18

Chapter 16

COMP

Chapter

BAD

ALPHA

BAD

CHAIN

Run—Time

Chapter

BAD

CHECKSUM

PATCH

Chapter

BAD

COMPILATION

Monitor

Chapter

BAD

DATE

Monitor

Chapter 2

BAD

DIGIT

Run-Time

Chapter

BAD

DIGIT

DATA

DAFT

Chapter 15

BAD

DIGIT

NUMERIC

SORT

Chapter 9

INITIAL

VALUE

BAD

DIRECTORY

FILEX

Chapter

BAD

DIRECTORY

Monitor

Chapter

BAD

DIRECTORY

PATCH

Chapter

BAD

DIRECTORY

PIP

Chapter

Message

Program

Refer

BAD

Monitor

Chapter

PATCH

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

5
N

LABEL

BAD NUMBER

BAD NUMERIC

VALUE

BAD

PROC

BAD

PROGRAM

Run—Time

Chapter

BAD

RECORD SIZE

SORT

Chapter

BAD

RELATIONAL

COMP

Chapter

BAD

SWITCH

SYSGEN

Chapter

BAD

SWITCH

DFU

Chapter

BAD

WORK

SORT

Chapter

PATCH

Chapter

DAFT

Chapter 15

BLOCK

UNIT

T00

COUNT

BIG

CANT BACKSPACE

PAST

BEGIN

BACKSPACE

WITH

SEQUENTIAL INPUT

CANT

FILE

IBWUIW
11

DAFT

Chapter 15

ERROR

COMP

Chapter

COMMA MISSING

COMP

Chapter

PIP

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

FILEX

Chapter

CCP

COMMAND SECTION NOT
COMPARISON
DATA

ERROR

INITIALIZATION

DEVICE

deV

FOUND

MISSING

ERROR

MUST BE

INCLUDED

DIBOL

FILE

NUMBER

DIBOL

FILE

NUMBER NOT

EDIT

BUFFER FULL

C-2

ERROR MESSAGE

USE

DISPLAY SECTION NOT

CONFIGURATION

INITED

FOUND

INDEX

SYSGEN

Chapter

Run-Time

Chapter

Run-Time

Chapter

Monitor

Chapter

Program

Refer

Run-Time

Chapter

DAFT

Chapter

DDT

Chapter

'FLOW

Chapter

COMMAND

Monitor

Chapter

dev,

Monitor

’Chapter

Message

END

FILE

END OF

INPUT

ERR

CMD

FILE

AT RECORD

ERROR
ERROR

ERROR ON

RETRY?

EXCESSIVE

GRID

EXPECTED

LABEL

SIZE

DAFT

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

DAFT

Chapter

MISSING

NOT ALLOWED

EXPRESSION

nnnn

EXTRA

CHARS

EXTRA

CHARS

STMNT

END

COMP

Chapter

EXTRA

CHARS

STMNT

END

SORT

Chapter

SORT

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

FILEX

Chapter

FIELD NUMBER MISSING
FIELD

TOO

LARGE

FILE

ALREADY

FILE

NOT

FOUND

Monitor

Chapter

FILE

NOT

FOUND

PATCH

Chapter

FULL

FILEX

Chapter

FULL

SYSGEN

Chapter

Chapter 16

Chapter

HEADER

EXISTS

TOO

LONG

ILLEGAL

CURSOR

ILLEGAL

DEVICE

DFU

Chapter

ILLEGAL

DEVICE

FILEX

Chapter

ILLEGAL

DEVICE

Run—Time

Chapter

ILLEGAL

DEVICE

PIP

Chapter

POSITION

SWITCH

ERROR MESSAGE

INDEX

C-3

Message

Program

Refer

ILLEGAL OPERATOR

COMP

Chapter

ILLEGAL

PROGRAM

Monitor

Chapter

ILLEGAL

RECORD

DAFT

Chapter 15

ILLEGAL

RECORD

Run—Time

Chapter

ILLEGAL

SORT

Chapter 9

ILLEGAL

STATEMENT

Chapter

ILLEGAL

STMNT

COMP

Chapter

ILLEGAL

SUBSTRING

Run-Time

Chapter

ILLEGAL

UNIT

Monitor

Chapter

ILLEGAL

UNIT

SORT

Chapter

CLOSING

FILE

KEY

IMPROPER

DEFINITION

Chapter

IMPROPER

LITERAL

Chapter

IMPROPER

USE

Chapter

Monitor

Chapter

DECIMAL

PLACES

USE

INSUFFICIENT

SPACE

DEVICE

DFU

Chapter

INSUFFICIENT

SPACE

DEVICE

FILEX

Chapter

INITIAL

ALPHA

VALUE

DOESN'T

BEGIN

WITH

QUOTE

SORT

Chapter

INITIAL

VALUE

TOO

BIG

SORT

Chapter

INITIAL

VALUE

TOO

SMALL

SORT

Chapter

INITIAL

VALUE

WRONG

SIZE

COMP

Chapter

INTEGER

FROM

REQUIRED

Chapter

INTEGER FROM

1-15
1-132

REQUIRED

INTEGER

REQUIRED

Chapter

INVALID

OPERATION

PATCH

Chapter

DAFT

Chapter

KEY

C-4

ENTIRELY

PAST

ERROR MESSAGE

END

INDEX

RECORD

Montage
KEY

EXTENDS

KEY

TOO

LABEL

PAST

END

RECORD

BIG

NOT ALLOWED

Program

Refer

DAFT

Chapter 15

DAFT

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

LINE

TOO

LONG

Monitor

Chapter

LINE

# TOO LARGE

Monitor

Chapter

LINE

TOO

LONG

Run-Time

Chapter

LONG

Chapter 16

BIG

PATCH

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

LITERAL

TOO

LOCATION TOO
MISSING

PAREN

MISSING

QUOTE

MISSING

INITIAL

MISSING

OPEN

ALPHA

VALUE

PAREN

MISSING OPERAND
MODE

INITIAL

VALUE

SORT

Chapter

SORT

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

MISSING

OR BAD

MISSING

QUOTE

COMP

Chapter

MISSING

RELATIONAL

COMP

Chapter

MOUNT

filnam

#nn

FOR

INPUT:

Monitor

Chapter

MOUNT

filnam #01

FOR

INPUT:

Monitor

Chapter

MOUNT

filnam

Monitor

Chapter

Chapter 16

COMP

Chapter

Chapter 16

CREF

Chapter

MUST

#nn FOR OUTPUT:

IDENT

MUST BE NUMERIC
MUST

NAME

PREVIOUSLY

NEED

FILE

nnn

ITEM

S
DEFINED

NAME

BEING

IGNORED

ERROR MESSAGE

INDEX

C-S

Message

Program

Refer

BOOT

Chapter

Run—Time

Chapter

PATCH

Chapter 11

NO COMMA AFTER FIELD NAME

SORT

Chapter

NO DATA

DAFT

Chapter

END

FILEX

Chapter 10

ENDING QUOTE

Chapter

FILE

Run-Time

Chapter

Monitor

Chapter

BUFFERS

CHANGE

?NO

FILE

LEFT
BLOCK

SAVE

INIT

Monitor

Chapter

INPUT

FLOW

Chapter

INPUT

SORT

Chapter

INPUT

DIRECTIVE

Chapter 16

INPUT

FILE

DAFT

Chapter 15

LABEL

NAME

DAFT

Chapter 15

Monitor

Chapter

OUTPUT

FILE

DAFT

Chapter 15

ITEMS

Chapter 16

NO ROOM

FILEX

Chapter 10

PIP

Chapter

BUFFER

ROOM

NOT A OR

COMP

Chapter

NOT A OR

SORT

Chapter

Chapter 16

NOT

DEFINED

NOT

ENOUGH

RIGHT

NOT

ENOUGH

ROOM

C-6

PARENTHESES
FOR

ERROR MESSAGE

SYSTEM

INDEX

AND

FILES
DFU

Chapter

Program

ROOM

NOT ENOUGH

FOR SYSTEM AND

Refer

FILES
FILEX

Chapter 10

NOT

FOUND

FILEX

Chapter 10

NOT

LABEL

COMP

Chapter

SORT

Chapter

SORT

Chapter

DFU

Chapter

Run-Time

Chapter

SORT

Chapter

DAFT

Chapter 15

DAFT

Chapter 15

NOTHING AFTER FIELD NAME
REPEATED OR OUT

NUMBER

# TOO LARGE
LONG

NUMBER TOO

ERROR

OUTPUT

OUTPUT FILE ALREADY OPEN
OPEN

ORDER

OUTPUT

FILE

STILL

PICTURE

T00

LONG

Chapter 16

PROGRAM

TOO

BIG

COMP

Chapter

PROGRAM

TOO BIG

Run-Time

Chapter

DAFT

Chapter

Run—Time

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

Monitor

Chapter

PUSHDOWN OVERFLOW
OVERFLOW

PUSHDOWN

TOO

RECORD

BIG

REPLACE?
REPLACE

filnam

#nn ?

Monitor

Chapter

RETURN

WITHOUT

CALL

Run-Time

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

SUBSCRIPT ERROR

COMP

Chapter

SUBSCRIPT NOT NUMERIC

COMP

Chapter

SUBSCRIPT

Run-Time

Chapter

SYNTAX ERROR

DFU

Chapter

SYNTAX

Chapter

STMNT

TOO

COMPLEX

TOO

ERROR

BIG

ERROR MESSAGE

INDEX

C-7

Message

T00

MANY

COLUMNS

T00 MANY

COMMANDS

T00 MANY

COMMANDS

T00 MANY

COMPUTE

T00

DATA

MANY

REPORT

FOR

CODE

STATEMENTS

ITEMS

Program

Refer

Chapter 16

Chapter 18

Chapter

T00 MANY

FILES

SORT

Chapter

T00 MANY

ITEMS

COMP

Chapter

T00 MANY

LEFT

PARENTHESES

Chapter 16

T00

MANY

LIST

ITEMS

Chapter

T00

MANY

RIGHT

Chapter 16

T00

MANY

SYMBOLS!

COMP

Chapter

TOO

MUCH

DATA

COMP

Chapter

UNDEFINED NAME

COMP

Chapter

UNKNOWN DIRECTIVE

Chapter

UNRECOGNIZABLE

SORT

Chapter

COMP

Chapter

ZERO DIVISOR

Run-Time

Chapter

0 NOT ALLOWED

DAFT

Chapter

WRONG

C-8

DATA

PARENTHESES

LINE

TYPE

ERROR MESSAGE

INDEX

APPENDIX

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D.1

ACCEPT AND DISPLAY

D.1.1

Background Information

statements were originally used when the terminal was a Teletypefi
The
VT52
display terminal uses newer concepts
programmable cursor
control and hardware display clear.
ACCEPT and DISPLAY statments were
the DIBOL language to use these features.
to
The terminal can
added
in two ways:
now be used
XMIT

-—

Teletype by using

powerful

XMIT

data entry

statements.

tool

using

and

DISPLAY

statements.

(Refer

the

and

DISPLAY

statements

Chapter

before

proceeding further.)

Interaction

D.1.2

and

DISPLAY

DISPLAY statements are used extensively in data entry
pro—
The
These data entry programs typically work one of two ways.
This
first asks (DISPLAY) questions and interprets (ACCEPT) answers.
The second method
method
of
operation closely simulates a Teletype.
or
on
the
screen
and
the cursor either
a
format
moves
heading
displays
to the right or to a position below the question to be answered.

and

grams.

is
data
en—
second method, the format is never cleared but
This method is used
and
cleared continuously from the screen.
in repetitive data entry and updating.
Quite often the four
keys
up
down arrow, left arrow, and right arrow have special meanings.
arrow,
For example, assume ten headings are displayed on the screen, indicatten
fields
are to be entered or updated.
The up arrow might be
ing
used to re—enter information in the first field, no matter which field

With

tered

the

inforthe down arrow might mean no more
is currently being entered;
the left arrow might restart entering
for
mation
any of the fields;
the
the right arrow might mean go on to
data into the current field;
next field without changing the current field.

Example Using ACCEPT and

D.1.3

DISPLAY

a six—digit customer
number
following program might be used:

enter

the

and

lS—character

customer

name,

RECORD

TCHAR,D2
ALPHA,A15
CNO,D6
CNAME,A15
PROC

DISPLAY(1,1,1)
;Clear screen and position cursor.
CUSTOMER NAME')
DISPLAY(0,0,'CUSTOMER NO.
DISPLAY(2,1,2)
;Clear line 2 and position cursor.
ALPHA=
;Clear this field.
ACCEPT(TCHAR,ALPHA)

LOOP,

ERROR

LOOP

;Re—enter

not

numeric.

CNO=ALPHA
ALPHA=

DISPLAY(2,16,0)

;Clear this field again.
;Position cursor.

ACCEPT(TCHAR,ALPHA)
CNAME=ALPHA

;Save data.

D.1.4

LOOP

Generalized ACCEPT Subroutines

D.1.4.1

ple

Hardware

works

Clear

lacks

Type RUBOUT to clear
the

program

Type CTRL/U
rent

Since

properly,

both
2.

Display

data

line

and

Feature
Although the previous
features which would be useful:
—

(a DIGITAL convention)

from

both

the

program

D-2

and

clear

the

character

the

entire

from

cur-

display.

is getting more sophisticated, it
can
best
be
calls to a subroutine.
The following two subroutines and
will accept
data from
the keyboard and use the RUBOUT
programs

acceptance

performed by
test

entered

the previously
the display.

exam-

ADVANCED

PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

the CTRL/U key as previously
first
The
specified.
program
the
clearing feature built into the hardware of the VT52.
same
line
the
Unfortunately, this feature destroys data if it is on
and to the right of what is being accepted.

key and
uses

START

KBDIN,

RECORD
A80
RECORD
80A1

ROW,

RECORD
D2

COL,

TCHAR,
CHAR,

D2
Al
D2
D2

KBDBUF,

VTSZIN,
VTLIM,

;Erases

remainder

line

;Storage for keyboard

for

errors.

input.

;Work

area.

;Cursor Y—coordinate on entry to
;(needed for correction only).
;Cursor X—coordinate on entry to
;(needed for correction only).

subroutine

VT52

subroutine VT52

character in an accept statement.
from an accept statement.
character
;Input
;Number of characters accepted by subroutine VT52.
;Number of characters to be accepted by
;subroutine VT52.

;Terminating

PROC

BEGIN,

DISPLAY(1,1,1)
;Clear screen.
DISPLAY(1,40,'ERASED IN CORRECTION‘)
DISPLAY(1,1,'NAME:')

***********

ROW=1

SAMPLE

COL=6
VTLIM=20
CALL VT52

TEST
PROGRAM

;20

(KBDBUF.EQ.'END')

characters
STOP

~\.

CALL

***********

sequence
ROW= Y coordinate
COL= X coordinate
VTLIM= Maximum number

*
*

‘

BEGIN

Calling

maximum.

*
*

characters

VT52

;Accept a maximum of VTLIM characters at location specified by
;ROW and COL. Return when either the maximum number of characters
;(VTLIM) has been entered, a termination character is entered,
is entered. Rubout deletes last character entered and
the entire entry. RUBOUT and CTRL/U clear the
eliminates
;CTRL/U
;remainder of the line faster than displaying spaces.
;or

space

VT52,

VT521N=

VT522,

ACCEPT(TCHAR,CHAR)
IF (TCHAR.EQ.O) GO TO VT523
IF (TCHAR.EQ.21) GO TO VT524

KBDBUF=

;Nonterminating character.
;CTRL/U.

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

D-3

VT523,

(TCHAR.EQ.32)

TO VT525

;RUBOUT.

RETURN

;Terminating

IF(CHAR.EQ.‘

;than rubout or CTRL/U.
;Space is a terminating

RETURN

character

;character.
;To eliminate
this

this

other

feature,

and put
;label on next statement.
;VT521N=# of input characters.

;remove

INCR VTSZIN

statement

KBDIN(VT521N)=CHAR

VT524,

(VT521N.EQ.VTLIM)

RETURN

;The specified number of
;characters were input.

VT522

IF(VT521N.EQ.0) GO TO VT52
DISPLAY(ROW,COL,2)

;to
GO

VT525,

characters entered
end—of—line.

;Clear

TO VT52

IF(VT521N.EQ.0)
KBDIN(VTSZIN)=

VT522

VT52IN=VT521N-l

DISPLAY(ROW,COL+VT521N,2)

;RUBOUT previous
;to

D.1.4.2

Clear

VT522

Data
by Displaying
Spaces
program clears incorrectly entered data by displaying
slower than using the hardware display clear feature,
same line
and to the right is not cleared.

START

character

end-of-line.

Incorrect

;Corrects only characters in

—

The

following

spaces.
but data

This
on

error.

RECORD

KBDBUF,

KBDIN,

A80
RECORD
80Al
RECORD

BLNKSO, A80
DZ

ROW,

COL,

TCHAR,

VTLIM,

D2
Al
D2
D2

VT52XX,

CHAR,

VTSZIN,

;Storage for

keyboard input.

;Work area.
;80 blank characters.
;Cursor Y coordinate on
;(needed for correction
;Cursor X coordinate on
;(needed for correction

;Terminating

character

ADVANCED

subroutine

VT52

entry to subroutine VT52
only).
in

statement.

;Input character from an ACCEPT statement.
;Number of characters accepted by subroutine VT52.
;Number of characters to be accepted by
;subroutine VT52.
;Temporary storage for subroutine VT52.

PROC

D-4

entry

only).

PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

is
the

BEGIN,

DISPLAY(l,l,l)
;Clear screen.
DISPLAY(1,40,'NEVER ERASED')

***********
*

DISPLAY(l,l,'NAME:')

ROW=1

SAMPLE

COL=6
VTLIM=20

TEST

PROGRAM

characters

maximum.

CALL VT52

(KBDBUF.EQ.'END')

GO TO

‘0

;20

STOP

***********

BEGIN

Calling

sequence
ROW= Y-coordinate

X-coordinate
Maximum number of characters to accept
CALL VT52
~u
;Accept a maximum of VTLIM characters at location specified by
;ROW and COL. Return when either the maximum number of characters
;(VTLIM) has been entered, a termination character is entered,
;or a space is entered. RUBOUT deletes last character entered and
;CTRL/U eliminates the entire entry. RUBOUT and CTRL/U display
;space(s) to delete only the necessary characters (not the
~n

COL=

~¢

VTLIM=

;remainder

the

line).

VT52,

VT521N=

VT522,

ACCEPT(TCHAR,CHAR)
IF
(TCHAR.EQ.0) GO TO VT523
IF
(TCHAR.EQ.21) GO TO VT524
IF (TCHAR.EQ.32) GO TO VT525

;RUBOUT.

RETURN

;Terminating

KBDBUF=

VT523,

IF(CHAR.EQ.'

;Nonterminating
;CTRL/U.

;remove

INCR VT52IN

VT524,

RETURN

VT525,

statement.

input

characters.

;The specified number of
;characters were input.

VT522

;Clear

;Reposition

DISPLAY(ROW,COL,0)
TO

this

;VT521N=#

IF(VT521N.EQ.0) GO TO VT52
DISPLAY(ROW,COL,BLNK80(l,VT521N))
GO

other

character

;than RUBOUT or CTRL/U.
;Space is a terminating
;character.
;To eliminate this feature,

RETURN

KBDIN(VT521N)=CHAR
IF
(VTSZIN.EQ.VTLIM)

character.

characters

entered.

cursor.

VT52

IF(VT52IN.EQ.0)
KBDIN(VT521N)=

VT522

VT521N=VT521N-l

VT52XX=VT521N+COL

DISPLAY(ROW,VT52XX,' ')
DISPLAY(ROW,VT52XX,0)
GO

;Rubout previous character.

;Reposition

cursor.

VT522

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

D-S

D.l.4.3
the

Other Desired Features

previous program,

the

Right justification

Automatic

features

are

START

KBDBUF,

VT52IN,

VT5215,
VTSZXX,

the

following subroutine and

A16
PROC
INCR

;Clear

screen.

24)
(ROW,53,'NOT ERASED')
(ROW,1,'NAME:')

.GT.

STOP

;20 characters maximum.
STOP

D-6'

SAMPLE

TEST

*
*

PROGRAM

***********

BEGIN

Calling

***********

COL=34
VTLIM=15
CALL VTSZN

statement.

(KBDBUF.EQ.‘END')
DISPLAY(ROW,30,'NO:')

‘0

ROW

(ROW

;Input character from an ACCEPT statement.
;Number of characters accepted.
;Number of characters to be accepted.
;Cleared for alpha input, set to l for numeric input.
;Contains numeric input for VT52N entry. Not changed
;or used in VT52A entry.
;Temporary storage for redisplay of numeric input.

COL=7
VTLIM=20
CALL VTSZA

‘0

program:

keyboard input.

;Terminating character

DISPLAY

test

;Cursor Y coordinate.
;Cursor x coordinate.

D2
D2
A1
D2
D2
D1
D15

DISPLAY

‘0

fields.

;Work area.
;80 blank characters.

fil

80Al

DISPLAY(1,1,1)
BEGIN,

;Storage for

RECORD

VTLIM,
VTSZSW,

the features found
also be desired:

BLNK80, A80
ROW,
COL,
TCHAR,
CHAR,

numeric

might

;Subroutine VT52A and VT52N.

RECORD
A80
RECORD

KBDIN,

features

positioning.

cursor

used

addition

following

These

sequence
Y coordinate
COL= X coordinate
VTLIM= Maximum number of characters
CALL VT52A for alphanumeric input
CALL VT52N for numeric input
ROW=

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

;Accept a maximum of VTLIM characters at location specified by ROW
;and COL. Return when VTLIM characters or a termination character
For numeric input, a space is a terminator.
;is entered.
deletes
last character entered and CTRL/U eliminates the
;RUBOUT
;entire entry. RUBOUT and CTRL/U display space(s) to delete only
;the necessary characters (not the remainder of the line).
;For

numeric

input, the entire entry is redisplayed right-justified
zeros suppressed.
VT5215 contains the number
to the calling program.

;with leading
;on

return

VT52A,

VT525W=

VT52N,
VT52,

;Entry for alphanumeric

VT52
VTSZSW=1
VT521N=
KBDBUF=
GO

input.

numeric

;Entry for

input.

;Position cursor.
ACCEPT(TCHAR,CHAR)
IF(TCHAR.EQ.0) GO TO VT523
;Nonterminating

DISPLAY(ROW,COL,0)
VT522,

IF(TCHAR.EQ.21)
IF

(TCHAR.EQ.32)
(VT521N.EQ.0)

TO VT524
GO TO VT525

;CTRL/U.

RETURN

;No

VT522X,

VT522Y,

IF
(VTSZSW.EQ.0) RETURN
VT5215=KBDBUF(1,VT521N)

character.

;RUBOUT.

input except terminating
;character.

;Alphanumeric input.

;Numeric input (can't exceed
;15 digits).
VT52XX(l,VTLIM+l)=VT5215,'XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX-' ;Allows negative
;numbers.
DISPLAY(ROW,COL,VT52XX(1,VTLIM+1))
;Display numeric input
‘

;right—justified

and

zero

;suppressed.
VT523,

RETURN
IF (VTSZSW.NE.1)

VT523B,

(CHAR.EQ.'—')
(CHAR.LT.'0')
IF (CHAR.LE.'9')
DISPLAY (0,0,7)

VT523X
VT522X

VT523X
VT523B
GO TO VT523X

VT523X,

(CHAR.EQ.‘

INCR VT52IN

KBDIN(VT521N)=CHAR
IF (VT521N.EQ.VTLIM)

VT526

VT524,

;The specified number of
;characters were input.

VT522

(VT52IN.EQ.0) GO TO VT52
DISPLAY(ROW,COL,BLNK80(l,VT52IN))
IF

VT525,

input.

;Sound alarm-—bad input.
;Start over (don't clear
;the error).
;VT521N=# of input characters.

VT52

;Save alphanumeric

;Space as a terminating
;character for numeric input.
;Minus sign is acceptable.
;Check for numeric input.

;Clear characters entered.

VT52

(VT521N.EQ.0)
KBDIN(VT521N)=
IF

VT522

VT52IN=VT52IN-l
VT52XX=VT521N+COL

DISPLAY(ROW,COL+VT521N,‘

;Rubout previous character.

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D-7

:Reposition

DISPLAY(ROW,COL+VT521N,0)
GO

VT526,

cursor.

VT522

IF(VTSZSW.EQ.1)

VT522Y

RETURN

A command protocol
D.l.4.4
is
Escape Code Sequences as Terminators
built around the Escape code (27 decimal) to implement commands needed
by the VT50 and VT52, but not found in 7-bit ASCII.
Upon
receiving
the
Escape code 27, the terminal is set to Escape mode and treats the
—

next
are

character received as a
called Escape Sequences.

order

for
code

the

use

command.

VT50/VT52

cursor

Commands

created

positioning keys

this

manner

terminators

statement, the DIBOL program must check for the Escape
27) and then execute another ACCEPT statement into a one

(decimal

field.
The contents of this variable can be
character
alphanumeric
The program then will erase
checked to determine which key was typed.
the alpha character entered in this manner and go to the routine associated to the key that was typed.
SPECIAL

27-A+
27—B+

27—C+
27—D+
27—P

ESCAPE

Cursor

SEQUENCES

Positioning

Functions

Special function keys at top
numeric keypad
(Unlabeled at present)

D.2

DIRECT ACCESS

Background Information

D.2.1

TECHNIQUES

file

contains

records

fixed

variable

length.

the
size,
system
automatically
operating
The size of a record
into 512—character blocks.
records
(in characters) is two plus the number of characters in all the fields
in the record.
(The two added characters represent the record size in
add
characters divided by two.) If the resulting record size is
odd,
one
character since only an even number of characters may be written.

Regardless of the record
writes

the

Example:
If

A88

D-8

the

two

field,

ADVANCED

fields in a record
record size is

the

are

defined

100

(2+9+88+l).

PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

field

and

in
records
Assuming that all of the
length, the operating system will pack

this
file
the
are
same
5 records and the first 12

characters of the sixth record into the first block;
the last 88
from the
characters
sixth record, 4 records, and
the first
24
characters from
the eleventh record into the second block;
and
so

the

When this

end.

file

input in

is later

processed, either

sequentially

(defined

statement) or through direct access (defined
as UPDATE
in an INIT statement), the operating system
will
comrestore
the record, even if it overlaps two blocks, bepletely
fore passing it to the DIBOL program.
as

D.2.2

The

Reason

for

INIT

Direct Access

Many applications involve the sequential processing of data.
transaction

file is entered in random
master file sorted in the same

order,

sorted

For

ex—

then
used to update a
Errors
in
sequence.
the
transaction file cannot be found until the UPDATE program is run.
made
for
the
The errors are corrected and a new transaction file is
corrected items, which is then sorted and run against the master file.
This type of
This process continues until no more errors exist.
pro—
20
of
evolved
with
the
electronic
data process—
years ago
age
cessing
ing.
Systems specialists have desired a better method of operation.

ample,

and

is to verify that data is entered correctly.
The
op—
keying the data file should be able to interact with the master
file.
For example, a program can be
written
in
which
an
operator
information
could type an employee number and know
entering
payroll
The

best method

erator

exists
on
the
master
within a second or two whether this
employee
file.
This would be impossible with sequential processing because of
Direct
acthe time involved in sequentially accessing every record.
of
desired
record
without
cess
retrieval
processing any
permits
any
other

D.2.3

records.

How

the Direct Access

Technique

Works

in DIBOL

The
to access any record in a file.
uses a record number
prohas
to convert operator input into a record number recognizable
gram
will
This section on direct access
explain
by the operating system.
several methods to make this conversion.
DIBOL

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D-9

0.2.4

Unsorted File

Assume

that

you have

1
unsorted file
containing
as
other
a KEY field as well

fields.
done in the

records.

This

contains
record
key
The first thing
be used for direct access.
following
is
to fill up a table.
There is a one-to-one correspondence
program
between each element in the table and each record in the file.
No 1/0
is
to
if
determine
a
code
is
in
the
master
file
necessary
specified
since this code would not have a match in the table lookup.

Each
will

RECORD MASTER
D5

KEY,
,

TABLE,
I,

LOOKUP,

:Could be any size field.
:Remainder of file.

A90
RECORD
10005
D3
D5
PROC 1
INI'I‘ (1 , INPUT,

:Working storage.
;Table containing keys.
;Index.
'

FILNAM ')

XMIT(1,MASTER,EOF)

LOAD,

INCR I

TABLE(I)=KEY
GOTO

LOAD

FINI(1)

EOF,

INCR

:Indicates end of table.
TABLE(I)=99999
INIT(1,UPDATE,'FILNAM')
;LOOKUP contains code for master
;file lockup.

FINDIT,

INCR

IF(TABLE(I).EQ.LOOKUP) GO TO FOUND ;Match.
IF(TABLE(I).EQ.99999) GO TO NONE 7N0 match.
NONE

GOTO
XMIT

FINDIT

(8,'RECORD NOT FOUND')

STOP

FOUND,

D-10

READ(1,MASTER,I)

;Read

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

record

Sorted File

0.2.5

in Section D.2.4 except sort the file by
same circumstances as
Filling the table is the same, but table lookup is faster since
code is not compared to every element in the table.
A "no
match"

the

Use

key.
the

condition
is

known

soon

down

the

table

element

exceeds

the

code.

number
of
in
the
table
comparisons
middle
of the table to the code, checking
which half of the table might contain the code, determining the middle
of that half of the table, and so on until the element is found.
This
more
comtechnique allows faster access, but programming it is much
It

lookup

possible to cut
by comparing

the

plicated.
RECORD

KEY,

A90

MASTER

RECORD

TABLE,
I,
LOOKUP,

D5
PROC

LOAD,

;Working storage.

100D5
D3
1

INIT(1,INPUT,'FILNAM')
XMIT(1,MASTER,EOF)
INCR

TABLE(I)=KEY
GOTO

EOF,

LOAD

FINI(l)
INCR

;Indicates end of table.
TABLE(I)=99999
INIT(l,UPDATE,'FILNAM')

;Lookup contains code for

master

file.
I:

FINDIT,

INCR

IF(TABLE(I).EQ.LOOKUP)
IF(TABLE(I).GT.LOOKUP)
NONE,

FOUND

GO TO NONE

GOTO

FINDIT

XMIT

(8,'RECORD NOT FOUND')

;Match.
;No match.

STOP

FOUND,

READ(1,MASTER,I)

;Read record I.

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D-ll

is impractical to use direct access with DIBOL on an unsorted
file
containing many records since an exceedingly large lookup table would

needed.

D.2.6

Rough Table,

some

point,

be
saved
available.

a
a

Index File

file will contain
table.
When this

too

many

point

records

reached,

for
two

every
key
solutions

to
are

The first is to create a "rough" index table containing every 10th
or
For
20th
key.
lookup, the rough index will specify within 10 or 20
is
or
20
records on the master file which one
desired.
These
10
records are then sequentially examined to find the desired record (see
the following example program).
and
“fine"
a
The second solution is to create a "rough" index table
In this method, the rough index table specifies to within
index file.
The index file is then
10 or 20 records of the file desired.
sequenIf a match occurs, the mastially examined to find the desired key.
ter file is then read.

The proper use of an index file technique can cut down on
the
number
of
For
a
file
of
98
characters
reads.
master
I/O
per record
example,
would take up to four I/O reads to find
the
desired
record
if
the
index
An index file technique
could narrow within 20 records.
rough
This technique bewould take one I/O read to find the master record.
comes
faster as the size of the master file record increases.

RECORD MASTER
D5
A90

KEY,
,

TABLE,
1,
J,
LOOKUP,

:Working storage.
;lst,let,4lst key,etc.

RECORD
100D5
D4
D4
D5
PROC

(l,INPUT,'FILNAM')
XMIT(1,MASTER,EOF)
INIT

LOAD,

INCR I
IF (I.NE.I/20*20+l)
INCR J

TABLE(J)=KEY
GO

EOF,

;Save

LOAD

only lst,21st,4lst key,

LOAD

FINI(1)
INCR J

;Indicates end
INIT(1,UPDATE,'FILNAM')

TABLE(J)=99999

D-12

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

table.

etc.

;LOOKUP contains code

for

master

file.

I =1

ROUGH,

I NCR

IF(TABLE(I).LE.LOOKUP) GO TO ROUGH ;No rough match yet.
;Set I to beginning of rough index-1.
I=(I—2)*20
FINE,

INCR

READ(l,MASTER,I)
IF(KEY.LT.LOOKUP)

FINE

;NO match yet.

IF(KEY.EQ.LOOKUP) GO TO FOUND
XMIT (8,‘RECORD NOT FOUND')

;No match.

STOP

FOUND,

0.2.7

Rough Table Plus Index File
MASTER

RECORD

A90
RECORD
100D5
D4

;Working storage.
;lst,2lst,4lst key,

etc.

D5
RECORD
D5
PROC 2

LOAD,

;Index file.

INDEX

INIT(1,INPUT,'FILNAM')
INIT(2,0UTPUT,'XFILE')
XMIT(1,MASTER,EOF)
INCR

XKEY=KEY

XMIT(2,INDEX)
IF(I.NE.I/20*20+l)
INCR

;Create
GO

EOF,

index

file.

TABLE(J)=KEY
GO

fine

LOAD

;Save

only lst,let,4lst key.

LOAD

FINI(l)
FINI(2)
INCR

TABLE(J)=99999
INIT(l,UPDATE,'FILNAM')
INIT(2,UPDATE,'XFILE‘)

;Indicates end of table.

;LOOKUP contains code for master

file.

i=1

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

D-13

ROUGH,

INCR I

FINE,

INCR I

IF(TABLE(I).LE.LOOKUP) GO TO ROUGH ;No rough match yet.
;Set to beginning of rough index-l.
I=(I—2)*20
.

;Read index record.

READ(2,INDEX,I)

1F£XKEY.LT.LO0KUP) GO TO FINE ;No match yet.
IF(XKEY.EQ.LOOKUP)
XMIT

(81'RECORD NOT

FOUND

:No match.

FOUND')

STOP

READ(1,MASTER,I)

FOUND,

D.2.8

;Match.

Summary

This discussion on direct access does not
include
information
about
all
situations.
In cases where the master file is between
possible
2,000 and 40,000 records, the approach might be to have a
very
rough
table, a rough index file, a fine index file, and a master file.
is possible to work with a large unsorted master file
by creating
index
file
two fields:
the key field and the record
containing
When
a
number of the master file.
Sort
the
index
file
by
key.
match is
found
on
the key field of the index file, the program uses
the record number field to read the proper record of the unsorted mas—
ter file.
It

Creation of an index table or an index file can be done in a
separate
This separate program can save from several seconds to sevprogram.
eral minutes each time the program is run.
The index file would
only
need
to be changed when a master file is updated (perhaps on a weekly
or

monthly basis).

D.2.9

Record

Count

one
of the number of records in a master file,
reserve
in
first
The record
the
record to contain the record count.
is the number of records in the file.
When a record is added to

keep track

field
count

this
file, the record count in the first record is incremented by one
This technique will work fine
with
a
file
master
and written out.
that is out of order.

D-14

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D.3

DIRECT ACCESS NOTES

0.3.1

XMIT Statements

(Extending

File)

statements can be
XNIT
file.
An
XMIT

record

XMIT

n+1.

interspersed with direct access operations
following a READ with record n is equivalent to a

Successive XMIT's

following

WRITE

read

record

records

n+2,

transmits

n+3,

etc.

record

data

READ

n+1.

Records n+2 to the end of the file may be changed by successive XMIT's
after
a
WRITE.
However, to change a series of records in the middle
of the file, do not use a WRITE followed by several XMIT's.
The
ful

XMIT

D.3.1.l
the

statement

used

after

WRITE

statement

has

following

the

use-

applications.

Truncating

following

File

—

truncate

file

after

record

use

file

TECHNIQUES

D-15

sequence:

READ(channel,record,n)
WRITE(channe1,record,n)
XMIT(channel,NULL,EOF)

FINI(channel)

EOF,
where

NULL

record

with

contents

defined

by:

RECORD NULL
RECORD

0.3.1.2
with

Appending
records,

use

to a
the

File

—

following

READ(channel,record,n)
WRITE(channel,record,n)
XMIT(channe1,record)

append

records

the

end

sequence:

;Append records

file.

XMIT(channel,record)

EOF,

XMIT(channel,NULL,EOF)
FINI(channel)

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

0.3.1.3
of

the

Rewriting
file,

use

A File

the

rewrite

following

file

from

record

the

end

sequence:

WRITE(channel,record,N)
XMIT(channe1,record)
XMIT(channel,record)
;Rewrite records

EOF,

D.4

end—of-file.

XMIT(channel,NULL,EOF)
FINI(channel)

NUMERIC FIELD VERIFICATION

Any numeric field

that is entered in a DIBOL program should be checked
if
it
determine
contains
The numeric field
only numeric data.
should be read as an alphanumeric field
XMIT
or
an
ACCEPT
through
This move is preced—
statement.
Then it is moved to a numeric field.
ed by an ON ERROR statement to check for non—numeric data.
For
examto

ple:
RECORD

TCHAR,
DECMAL,
ALPHA,

D2
D5
A5

PROC

ALPHA=

ACCEPT(TCHAR,ALPHA)
ON

ERROR

FIX

DECMAL=ALPHA

With

an alphanumeric-to-numeric
lowing examples illustrate most

cases:

ALPHANUMERIC

NUMERIC

00123
00123
00123

123'
'
'123
'00123'
'
—123'
‘
123—'
'-123—'
'
12-3'
'1-2—3'
'1+2+3'
'1+2—3'
'
'1 23
'00128'

D-16

move,

ADVANCED

PROGRAMMING

00128
00128
00123
00128
00123
00123
00128
00123

illegal

TECHNIQUES

many checks

are

done.

The

fol—

The

characters

only legal

9!I.——JI

and

alphanumeric-to-numeric

move

are

‘-

file contains numeric fields, these fields must be
read
as
If
contain
a
the
least
they
negative number,
significant
contains a minus sign and
is
listed
with
its
equivalent
character.
For
If 3W were read as
example, —37 would look like 3W.
run-time
error
would
alphanumeric, and then converted to numeric, a
occur
since
letter
of
the
is
in
an
any
alphabet
illegal
conversion.
alphanumeric-to-numeric
data

numeric.
character

D.5

CHAIN

STATEMENT NOTES

0.5.1

Interaction of CHAIN and

Source

input files can be specified
Accessing such files

programs.
lowing rules.
All

files must
files.

the

dummy

statements.

command

first

command containing chain—
done according to the fol-

the

RUN

command

the

before

pronam,

filnaml...,filnam7

files

could be processed
in pronam.

statement

value

over"

were:

Transferring Variable

the
chained

must

source

D.5.2

For

file

RUN

source
input
open the first
files by
the
chained
"skip
remaining
In the above RUN
issuing dummy INIT(channel,SYS) statements.
in
to
read file INPl, PRONAM would have to
order
command,
Because CHAINZ
issue two dummy INIT(channel,SYS) statements.
is
the
last
chain
program, it would not have to issue any

RUN

CHAIN

listed

Any CHAIN statement which is

the

must

PRONAM+CHAIN1+CHAIN2,INPl,INP2

.RUN

CHAIN

source

(channel,SYS)

INIT

variable
to

program
occupy the same

complished by either

than

once

executing

Values

be successfully
transmitted
from
one
in
the
variable
which
the
value
another,
appears
location in both CHAIN programs.
This may be acof the two following methods.
to

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D-l7

Define

be
records which are to
passed
and
make
the
definitions
programs
for variable names which may be different).

between

chained

identical

(except

all

first,

Example:
Chainl

Chain2

RECORD

CUST,
PROD,
RECORD

STOCK,

Use

the

Multiple
it

D2
INVENT
D4

RECORD

QUANTY,

INVENT
D4

compiler storage maps listing for the
that the desired variables
verify

two

CHAIN

occupy

pro-

the

same

location.

storage

Sometimes

CPINFO

CUST, A30
PCODE, D2

grams

0.5.3

A30

CHAIN

Entry Points

desirable
the

However,
program.
chained program at the
the
Using
technique

CHAIN

first

have

several

statement

entry points
starts

always
following

the

into
a
execution
PROC

CHAIN
of

the

statement.

of transferring variable values between chained
the
multiple entry points can be programmed as indicated in
following example.

programs,

Chainz

Chainl
RECORD

RECORD

WHERE,D2,01
RETURN,D2

WHERE,D2
RETURN,D2

PROC

TO(Ll,L2,L3,L4),WHERE
Ll,RETURN=2

CHAIN

TO(E1,E2,E3),WHERB

L2,...
WHERE=RETURN
CHAIN l

D-18

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

D.6

DIBOL PROGRAMMING OF SOURCE FILES

D.6.l

Operating

RUN

The

run

DIBOL

program.

They

are

not

available

DIBOL

program.

Division

Data

RECORD

filnaml...,filnam7

pronam,

edit buffer

D.6.2

The

files can be used
time by:

source

seven

specified

Procedures

description

RECORD

would

follows:

recnam

LINENO, A2
CHAR, A120
LINENO

contains
the

ignore
the

line

two-character line
number.
However,

number

can

in binary.
Most
programs
be converted to decimal by

statement:
varnam

Varnam

must

#LINENO*64+#LINENO(2,2)

CHAR contains

the

DIBOL

four-digit field.
characters

program
may
record.
This can be
lines:

want

done

one
line created by the
editor.
determine the number of characters in
with
preceding the RECORD statement

The
the

the

RECORD

TRICK,
and

2A1

adding the following line in
varnam

the

Procedure Division:

(4096-64*#TRICK(3)—#TRICK(4)*2

three-digit field.

Varnam must

There is
Monitor

tabbing within

by output from

the

command LIST or LIST/L is done by the operating system.
of
are
internally stored as characters with a decimal equivalent
Any character may be checked for a tab by the statement:

Tabs

IF(#CHAR(n,n).EQ.61)

CHAR.

The

tabbing

seen

61.

TAB

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D-19

D.6.3

The

Procedure Division

first

following

file

source

specified

the

RUN

command

opened

the

EOF

statement:

INIT(channel,SYS)
Each

record

is accessed

by the following

statement:

XMIT(channel,record,eof label)
When an end—of-file condition
label of the XMIT statement.
ment

be
file.

must

source

occurs,
At that

executed prior to an
To handle a variable

INIT(channel,SYS)

statement

the

transfers

program

EOF

label, a FINI channel
a
INIT(channel,SYS) to open

number of
ON
ERROR

state—

second

files, precede

source

The

statement.

the

program

will

to
the
ON
ERROR statement when an INIT(channel,SYS)
transfer
statement is executed and there are no more source files.

The

only

way

CHAIN

source

files.

process

which

statement

source

resets

file
the

than

once

execute

operating system pointers

files
This example combines up to seven source
file.
The resulting data file can be converted

into
to

single

data

file

using

source

FILEX.

Example:

RECORD

D3
RECORD
2A1
RECORD

SIZE,
TRICK,

A122
PROC

;Line from

LINE

source

file.

ERROR NOFILE

;Open system file.
;Open output file on logical unit 1.
XMIT(1,LINE,EOF)
;Read a line from source file.
SIZE=(4096-64*#TRICK(3)-#TRICK(4))*2 ;Get size of line.
XMIT(2,LINE(3,SIZE+2)) ;Output line without line number.
INIT(l,SYS)

INIT(2,0,'$FILE',1)

NEXT,

;Close system file.

FINI(l)

EOF,

ERROR

DONE

INIT(l,SYS)
GO

DONE,
NOFILE,

D-20

;Open

system file.

FINI(2)

;Close output file.

STOP

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

the

D.7

CHECKDIGIT FORMULA

applications involving identification numbers, each number may
for accuracy by a checkdigit, a redundant digit added to
The checkdigit is determined by performing an
ar—
the normal number.
on
ithmetic
the number in such a way that the usual errors
operation
encountered in transcribing a number are detected.
is
The checkdigit
In

most

verified

determined

follows:

with

Step 1

Start

Step 2

Multiply
right).

the

Add

Step 4

Subtract

ing in

the

first

Add

and

digit

every

the

sum

the

from

resulting

digit by
2

2
6

(left
*

numbers and
the
digits
1+0+7+1+2+4 =15

not

number

end-

Step 3 from the

higher

20-15=5

zero.

the

other
5

checkdigit

(This is the
D4 field.)
Note

number....5764.

the digits
multiplied.

Step 3

Step 5

correct

the

end

checkdigit

the original
if the number

57645
number.
is entered in a

In
that a checkdigit procedure is not completely
error
proof.
It is
example given above, 5764 or 5673 give the same checkdigit.

occur.
The
unlikely, however, that transpositions of this sort will
checkdigit does not guard against the possible assignment of an incorrect but valid code, such as the assignment of a wrong valid identifi—

cation code

customer.

number entered for a checkdigit calculation is shorter than the
the rightmost digit is used as the checkdigit and the remainder
on
left.
the
of the number is right—justified and padded with zeros
The zeros are considered when the checkdigit formula is calculated.

the

field,

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES

D-21

D.8

VTSO/VTSZ

ESCAPE SEQUENCBS

command protocol is built around the escape code (027) to
implement
needed by the VT50/VT52 but not found in 7-bit ASCII.
commands
Upon receiving the escape code 027, the terminal is set to escape mode
Commands created
and treats the next character received as a command.
in this manner are called Escape Sequences.
The VT50/VT52
recognizes
the following Escape Sequences:

those

Action Taken

Code

Character

ESC

Moves

cursor

Moves

cursor

down

Moves

cursor

right

Moves

cursor

left

Moves

cursor

Erases

first 027 changes
changes it back.

The

from

the

mode,

the

second

027

line.

one

line.

position.

one

the

cursor

position.

home

position.

position

the

end—of-

screen.

Erases

line

from

cursor

right margin.

The
terminal to identify itself.
will respond with 027 047 072;
terminal
047
075.
terminal will respond with 027
will
in
Other
different
terminals
respond

Requests the

VT50
VT52

ways.

1Teletype is a registered trademark of the Teletype Corporation.

D-ZZ

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

TECHNIQUES

GLOSSARY

alphanumeric
character set that contains letters, digits, and other characters
as punctuation marks.
such
The COS-310 alphanumeric character set
includes the uppercase letters A—Z, the digits 0—9, and most of the

acters,

on
the terminal
characters
back slash (\) and back arrow

nals

special
as

underscore),

are

keyboard.
(<——)

Two

(shown

these
some

char-

termi-

illegal.

array
A

DIBOL

length
fields,

for

technique
and
each

alphanumeric

specifying

The
array
to be three digits
fields, each to be

type.

field
of
the
same
space for five numeric
The array 2A10 describes two
long.
ten characters long.
more

5D3

than

one

reserves

ASCII

This

American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
method of coding alphanumeric characters.

one

file
A command to execute the
file containing a sequence of commands.
file will cause the commands within the file to be executed sequen-

batch
A

tially.
batch
The

processing
technique

stored

Monitor

automatically

executing

previously

constants

group

commands.

binary operator
An

operator,

such

variables

(e.g., A=B—C).

—,

which acts

upon

two

binary program
The

kind of program which

scratch area
The area in memory where
tion.

output by the compiler.

binary

the

binary

program

stored

during

execu-

Glossary-l

bit
A

binary digit (0

1).

block
The basic COS-310 unit of
of up to 512 characters.

storage capacity.

mass

block

consists

bootstrap
A

short routine

system software

loaded at system start-up time
be read into machine memory.

which

enables

the

branch
A

change

the

execution

sequence

COS—310

for

input

state-

program

ments.

buffer
A

temporary storage

used

usually

area

output

data

smallest

unit

transfers.

bug
An

error

malfunction

machine.

program

byte
A

group of bits considered
information that can be

unit.

channel
A number between 1 and 15 used
ment with a specified device.

byte

addressed

DIBOL

associate

the

program.

input/output

state-

character
A

letter, digit,

other

symbol used

control

represent

data.

character
A

string
linear

connected

sequence

characters.

clear

Setting

alphanumeric field

spaces

numeric

field

zeros.

command
An

operator

following

request for Monitor
RETURN

services;

usually

executed

key.

comments
Notes

for

Comments

are
read;
ignored
people to
they
optional and follow a semicolon on

are

concatenated

Strung

2-Glossary

together without intervening

space.

by
a

the

compiler.

statement

line.

conversational program

program.that prompts responses from an operator
pending upon the response from the operator.

and

reacts

de-

cursor

at
the
flashing light indicator which appears
where the next character will be displayed.

The

point

the

screen

data
A

representation of information in a manner suitable for communicaor
interpretation,
processing by either people or machines.

tion,

COS-310

systems,

data entry
The process

files.

Data

data

collecting

entry is key

represented by characters.

and
to

inputting

data

into

the

computer data

disk.

data management
The

planning, development, and operation of a system
an
to
its
information
mechanize
by
organization
available the data needed by the organization.

like
flow

COS-310
and make

debug
To

detect,

machine.

locate,

and

remove

errors

malfunctions

from

program

DEC

Acronym for Digital Equipment Corporation.
decimal
Refers

base

ten

number.

delimiting
The

device

bounds

(beginning

and

end)

series

string.

designation

The first
three-character designation for a mass storage device.
the third character
two
characters
designate the type of device;
designates the number of the drive on which the device is mounted.
A

device

independence

stored
COS—310 system design permits data files and programs to be
or
disks.
At run time, the operator chooses
on
diskettes
either
the most suitable or most available input and output devices.

device
A

designations

three-character

abbreviation used

name

the

COS-310

I/O

dev-

ices.
TTY

Screen

KBD

Keyboard

LPT

DKO-DK3
RXO-Rx3
DYO—DY3

Printer
Disk drives
Disk drives
Disk drives

Glossary-3

DIBOL

Digital's Business Oriented Language is
to write business application programs.
COS—310 system.
direct

COBOL—like language
used
The source language of the

access

The

process of obtaining data from, or placing data into, a storage
device
where the availability of the data requested is independent
of the location of the data most recently
obtained
or
in
placed

storage.

Direct

access

available

users

COS-310

systems by

writing the position number of any record in a data file.
ample, you can request the 5th, 35th, and 711th records in

For
a

ex-

file.

directory
A

place for listing information

with the

copy the
external

contents

for

reference.

Displayed

print-

command.

dump
To
to

all

part of storage,

usually

from memory

storage.

edit buffer
The

work

area

in memory where

files

source

are

created

and

edited.

end-of-file mark
A control character which marks the physical end of
a
multivolume
For
both
file.
input and output files, the Monitor detects this
next
EOF mark and types a message for the operator asking that the
volume in the file be mounted.
fatal

error

terminates program

which

execution.

field
A

specified

data;

in a data record used for alphanumeric
exceed the specified character length.

area

cannot

file
A

numeric

collection of

records,

treated

logical unit.

fixed-length records
Each
ords

only

rec—
record in a data file is the same length.
Fixed-length
are the only type handled by COS-310 utility programs and the
type on which direct access to data files is allowed.

flowchart
flow
pictorial technique for analysis and solution of data
Symbols represent operations, and
processing
problems.
necting flowlines show the direction of data flow.
A

data

4-Glossary

and
con-

handlers
A

specialized software function
peripheral devices.

interfaces between

which

the

system

and

illegal

character
character that is not
valid
to
the
COS-310
according
design
rules.
DIBOL
will not accept back slash (\) and back arrow (<——)
in
al(back arrow is replaced on some terminals with underscore)

phanumeric strings.
initialization
Putting a device into
successfully function

the correct format or
in a configuration.

position

where

can

input
Data

flowing into

the

computer.

input/output
Either

input

output,

I/O.

both.

jump
A

departure

from

the

normal

sequence

executing

instructions

computer.

justify
The

is
whose
size
process of positioning data in a field
larger
In alphanumeric fields, the data is left-justified
the data.
than
in
numeric
fields
and any remaining positions are space-filled;
the
are right-justified and any remaining positions to the
digits
left are zero—filled.

key
or more
sort
a
file.
fields within a record used to match or
If
a
file is to be arranged by customer name, then the field that
In a
sort
contains the customers' names is the key field.
opera—
the
fields of two records are compared and the records
tion,
key
are
resequenced when necessary.

One

load
To

enter

data

programs

into main memory.

load-and-go
An operating technique in which
loading and executing phases of

there
a

are

between

stops

the

program.

location

Any place where data may be Stored.

logical unit number
number (1—15) which identifies an
number
The
references
the
table
device.

entry in
to

logical

location

unit

table.

mass

storage

Glossary-5

logical units
An

area

storage

units

assigned

device.
to
15
storage
Up
logical
system start—up by the data file utility

mass

may
These areas and their assigned
program (DFU).
the logical unit table printed by DFU.

sizes

are

listed

loop
sequence of instructions that is executed repeatedly until a ter—
minal condition prevails.
A commonly used programming technique in
processing data records.
A

machine—level

programming
Programming using a sequence
cutable by the computer.

mass

binary

instructions

form

exe—

storage device
device

having large storage capacity.

master file
A data file

memory
The

that

authority

is
in

either
a

relatively permanent
particular job.

that

treated

computer's primary internal storage.

merge
combine records from two or more
another
that
is
string
arranged

similarly

phases
mnemonic
Brief
LPT,

sort

the

ordered

same

strings

order.

The

into
latter

operation.

identifiers which
and

are

easy

remember.

Examples

are

KBD,

TTY.

mode
A

designation

which

being

file
used.
a

used

was

INIT

to indicate the
for
purpose
indicate the input/output device

statements

opened

modulo
number
condition
where
the
exceeds
the
maximum
specified
in
a
The
maximum allowable number is then
condition
variable.
used
subtracted from the specified number and the remainder is
by
if 17 were specified (maximum is 15),
In modulo 16,
the processor.
16 would be subtracted from 17 and the processor would use 1 as the
variable.

Monitor
COS—310 system program
other useful tasks.

that

loads

and

runs

programs

and

performs

nest
To

embed

grams.

6-Glossary

subroutines,

loops,

data

other

subroutines

pro-

nonfatal
An

error

which will

error

not

completely terminate program execution.

nonsystem device
A device
tor.

that does not contain the operating system
device used exclusively for data storage.

and

the

Moni—

option switch
A

one—

two—character designation indicating a
with a command.
Usually preceded

conjunction

function
special
by a slash (/) in

COS-310.

output
Data

flowing

out

The

technique

the

same

the

computer.

overlay
data.

specifying several different
Special rules apply.

record

formats

for

parameter
A

variable

that

given

value

constant

for

specific

purpose

process.

peripheral equipment
Data processing equipment

which

distinct

from

the

computer.

pushdown stack
A

list

the

pushed

items where the last item entered becomes the first
item
list and where the relative position of the other items is
back one.

random access
Similar to

direct

access.

RECORD
A statement

that

reserves

memory

for

DIBOL

data

language

programs.

segment
Sixteen blocks

sequential operation
Operations performed,
serial

screen

The

one

block

after

the

512

bytes long.

other.

access

The process
the
where
most

storage.

recently obtained
line

number
which

number

data
into,
from, or
storage
putting
dependent upon the location of the data
placed in storage.

data
time is

getting

access

indicates

the

order

the

horizontal

lines

the

screen.

Glossary-7

sign
Positive
or
negative
positive.
are
but
numbers
prefixed
sign,
negative
is

number
Indicates whether a
numbers
do
not
require a
with the minus sign (—).

significant digit
A

source

that

digit

needed

program
written

recognized

in COS-310

A program

statement
An instruction

source

DIBOL

for

specified purpose.

language.

program.

string
A

connected

linear

subscript
A designation

sequence

characters.

which clarifies the
particular parts
within a larger grouping or array.

(characters,

records)

values,

switch character
A

single

letter

specified

command

following

language.

slash

(/).

syntax
The

rules

the

governing

structure

system configuration
The

combination of

puter

hardware

and

that make

software

usable

com-

System,

and

system.

system device
A mass storage device reserved for Monitor,
other

system and

source

Run-Time

programs.

systems directory
A

list

creation,

with

programs on the systems device
and other useful information.

lengths,

dates

system handlers

specialized software which interfaces
peripheral devices.
The

terminal
A

between

the

system

and

variable

alarm

signal emitted

from

the

terminal.

unary operator
An

operator,

constant

such

which

acts

upon

only

one

(e.g., A=-C).

utility program
A

system program which performs common services and requires format
Examples are SORT and PRINT.

programs.

8-Glossary

variable
A

quantity

that

can

assume

any

one

set

record
the data records are not
such records is not possible.

values.

variable—length
A

access

uniform

in which

file

length.

Direct

accomplished

accu-

verify
To

determine

transcription

of data has been

rately.
word
A
zero

string

binary

bits

representing

two

COS-310

characters.

fill
fill

the

remaining

character

positions

numeric

field

with

zeros.

Glossary-9

INDEX

Arithmetic operations, basic,
Arithmetic operators, binary,

A
/A, Sort,
ACCEPT,

9—4

Arrange records, 9—1
Array,
dimensions specified, 1-9
names without subscripts,
subscripted, 1-9

afield before, 1-4
generalized subroutines,
clear

D—2
ACCEPT

—

Input/Output statement,

1-37
subroutines, D—2
used with DISPLAY, 1-4
ACCEPT and DISPLAY, interaction,
D-l
Access to Data files, B—4
Add one to counter, l—25

1—3,

l-4,

Addition (+), 1-11
Addition of lines,

Arrays, 1—32
Arrow key,
down, D—l
left, D—l
up,

D-l

ASCII,
files

transferred

format,

FILEX

RESEQUENCE,

OS/8 input, 10-5
OS/8 output, 10-7
Assignment of logical units,
FILEX

Programming Techniques,

4-1,

4-7

Afield,
clear

before
defined, 1—4
stores
to

D-l

right,

D-l

Aid

1-13

10-1

2—21

Advanced

1-13
l—ll

Assignments,
logical unit on COS-310, 4—7
table of logical unit, 4—2, 4-3,

1-4

ACCEPT,

keyboard entry, 1-4
development, 7—1

program

Alarm,
terminal,

l—l8,
is

terminal

(PLEASE),

2—10

Algorithm for calculating segments
of logical units, 4-7
Allocate space to binary scratch

definition,

1-14

spaces,

1—13

fields

formatted to numeric
1-16
with embedded signs,

label,

l—l

fields,

literal,

1—9,

1-10

string, 1—18
Alphanumeric values
values,

numeric

1-11, l-lS
(CCP), 5-5
file, D-15

Angle brackets

Appending

Arithmetic
Arithmetic

numbers,

2-19

B
BATCH,
certain programs
Monitor command,
BATCH
Batch

destination cleared
fields

line

D~6

positioning,

cursor

terminate,

2-5

after error, 2-5
command file, 2-4, 2—5
file, terminate with CTRL/C,

restart

8—6

8—1,

area,

4-6

1-19

sounded

Alphanumeric,
data, moving,

4-5,
Automatic
Automatic

expressions,
expressions,

l—ll

2—5
Batch file

START

(SYSGEN),

3—4
Batch file

START,

space

3—2
Batch stream,
from, 2—5

not

3-2,

required,

accept input

Batching commands, 2-1
Binary arithmetic operators,
Binary file, transfer, 8-3
Binary files, COS—310, xiv,

l—ll
B—2

Binary operators,
addition

(+),

COS—310,

1—12

division

(/),

1—11
l-ll

addition,

1—13
calculate, 1-9
division, 1—13

multiplication (*), l—ll
priority of execution, l-ll
rounding (#), l—ll

multiplication, 1-13
rounding, 1—12
subtraction, 1—13

subtraction

(-),

l—ll

Index-1

INDEX

Binary program, 2—13
compiler converts source program
to,

copied

5_l
and

debug with DDT,

device,

with DELETE,
executes, 2-11

size

of,

5-6

use

SAVE

area,

2—7

obtain,

messages,

2—19

12—1

program,

limitations,

2—20

xiv

1-26
Channel number
1-21

12—1

operating procedures,

A—ll

xv,

1-17
I

uppercase, xiv
Channel (definition), 1-21
Channel in INIT, 1-26
Channel number associates mode,

BOOT,
error

number

lowercase,

COS—310,

special COS-310, xv
special in formatting,
terminating, 1—5

5-4
2-12
allocate

8—6

to,

line,

Blank

store,

scratch
scratch

space

Set,
Characters,

maximum in source program, 1-3
maximum number on line, 2—18
maximum per line, 1-3
red, xiv

6-1

erase

Binary
Binary

Character

line
stored

2—13

RUN

(Cont.)

12~1

disassociates mode,

is, 12-1
Monitor loaded via, 2-4
Braces notation conventions, xv
Brackets, angle (CCP), 5-5
Brackets notation conventions, xv
Branch program control, 1-6, 1—23
Breakpoint, DDT, 6-1

Change system handlers, 3—1, 3—3
Change system date, 2—6
Changes to lines-per-page
configuration, 13-1
Changes using line numbers, 2—14
Check, perform a Read/, 8-2, 8—7
Checkdigit formula, D—Zl

Clear

Bootstrap,

BOOT

Bootstrap,

from line, 2—20
fields and records, 1—9,
1—13, 1—19

Clear

,C option

(clear

Calculate
1—9

arithmetic

1—31

record),

expressions,

Calculating the segments for
logical unit, 4-7

statement, 1—3, 1—6
subroutine, 1—6
CALL traceback, subroutine,
(DDT),
CALL

Control

—

CALL

6-1

points to error, 5—8
(Conditional Compilation

Caret

CCP

Procedure),

5-5

CCP

sections nested

CCP

5-6
value

any

independent of

5—6
CHAIN and INIT,
CHAIN
Control

depth,

DIBOL

value,
-

interaction, D—l7
statement,

1-3,

hardware

control

returns

program,

to
1-7

incorrect

text

Cmndfl

(definition),

xvi

BATCH, 2-5
DAFT, 15-1
FILEX, 10—4
FLOW, 17-1
MENU, 18-1
PATCH, ll—l
PIP, 8—1
PRINT, 16-2
SORT, 9—1, 9-2
Code,
COS—310

Command

multiple entry points,
programs

declared

command,

D—l8

interpretive,

file,

BATCH, 2-5
DAFT, 15—2
FILEX, 10—4

RUN

147

program example, 1-7
TRACE and Trap turned

with valid

1—8

DDT,

display,

data, D-4
from edit buffer, 2—15
Clearing feature of VT52, D—3
Close data files, 1—21
Clear
Clear

requirements,
skip-code, 1—22
words of required,

CHAIN,

2—Index

function,

D—2

5—7

1—7

DIBOL

,Clear

data

off,

1—8

FLOW,
MENU,

binary program,

1—8

PIP,

17-1
18-1

8—1

5-7

xiv

INDEX

PRINT,

SORT,

16—2, 16—3
9—1, 9—2

Control

6-2

Commands,

DDT,

Commands

entered

response

Monitor, 2—4, 2—14
Commands, Monitor Keyboard,

2—2

Commands, orderly execution of
(MENU), 18—1
Comments,

line,

statement

with
with
COMP,

/DI
/G,
/NI

CALL, 1—6
CHAIN, 1—7
GO TO, 1-23
IF, 1-24
ON ERROR, 1—28
RETURN, 1-33
STOP, 1-35
1—37

Conventions,
braces, xv
brackets, xv
manual notation,

PROC, 1-29
START, 1—34

Conversational
5-2
5-1
5-].

1-11
Convert to

(compiler),
by RUN, 2-11
defined, xiii, 5—1

Copy and verify,
5—1

operating procedures,
Comparison between expressions,
Comparison between relational
expressions, 1-24
Compatibility with OS/8, 10-4

converts

(CCP),

program,

statement,

END,

character

5—1

5—8

1-20,

statements,

PROC,

5—1

START,

1-29

1-3,

1—20

storage map listing,

5—3

set,

9-1

1—12

A-l

interpretive code,

source
source

8-5

files,

xiv,

2-14

line number editor, 2—14
logical unit assignments,
records in, 10—1

DAFT, 15—1
FLOW, 17—1
PRINT, 16-1
Computed GO TO, 1—23
Conditional compilation (CCP), 5-5
Consolidate space in directory,

8-2,

3—3

data files, B-l
data input, FILEX, 10—6
data output, FILEX, 10—8
file structure, xiv
files, B—l

Compiling procedure,

Consolidate files, 8—1
Control,
branches by CALL, 1—6
branches to RETURN, 1-6
branches with GO TO, 1-23
master program, 2—1

records

characters,

operating procedures,
1—3,

5-5

program

binary

device,

2—13

arranges

5-1
messages,

Copy binary program

binary files, B—2
binary operators,

5-2

onto

COS—310:

Compilation procedure,
source

8—7

8-2,

Copy device, 8—3
Copy Monitor and/or files,

1—24

conditional

data,

source

1-9

5-1

Compilation,
listing,
Compiler,

equivalent decimal

Converting data, 1-9
Converts and justify

accessed

error

3—1

program,

1-12

code,

COMP

DIBOL,

xiv

Conversion, data, l—ll
Conversions, justification of,

/0, 5—2
/T, 5-1

DIBOL,

1-3

(DIBOL),

statements

TRAP,

1-1
1-1

following semicolon,
on

(Cont.)

file

output,
files, B-l

FILEX,

4—7

10—8

storage hierarchy, 4-7
system files, B-2
unary operators, 1—12
COS MONITOR, 2-4
Create system on new device, 3—l
Creation of report programs, 16—1
Creation of source file (PRINT),
FILEX,
CREF

16-2

(Cross Reference)

program,

7-1
error

messages,

7—2

Index—3

INDEX

moving alphanumeric,
moving numeric, 1—14

7—1

operating procedures,
7-l

table,

(Cont.)

with

transfer

CTRL/C
Monitor Keyboard command, 2—2,
to terminate batch file, 2-5
CTRL/O, 2-2, 2-17
CTRL/Q, 2-2, 2-17
CTRL/S, 2—2, 2-17
0—1

CTRL/U,
CTRL/Z,

2-2,
2-2,

2-19,
2—19,

Current

date

specification

11—4,
6—3

1—32
Cursor positioning,

1—18,

(,D),
D—6

Data

XMIT,

1—14

1—40

manipulation,

expressions, l—lO
literals, 1—10
statements (DIBOL),
variable name,

variables,

1—9

1-3,

1—9

1-9

Datasystem 308 or 310, xiii
DATE command, 2—4, 2-6
DATE, Monitor command, 2-6
Date, system stores, 2—6
Dates, valid, 2—8
DDT

(DIBOL Debugging
commands, 6—2

(data specification),

,D RECORD

error

1—32
DAFT

in
and

Fix),

file,

15—2

(Dump

command

15-1

compiling procedure,
messages,
keyword, 15—2

15—1

15-5

from

line,
incorrect,

copy and

definition

Data

2—20
D-4

Decimal
Decimal

8-2, 8-7
1-9, 1-11

statement

division, define destination
in, 1-9
entry programs, D—l

area

file output, COS—310 (FILEX),
10-8
Data file, transfer a, 8—2, 8-4
Data File Utility program (DFU),
Data

4—1
access

COS—310,

arranges
2—7
transfer, 8—4

records

in,

10-6

between fields, 1—9
from memory with WRITE,
1-39

move

4—Index

dfield,

9—1

4—2

DFU/B,

lines—per—page

(SYSGEN),

13-1
Default
DELETE

value (SYSGEN), 3-2
command, 2—2, 2—4, 2— 7

FILEX,

key,

lO—ll
2—19

2—2,

lines

(RESEQUENCE),

2—21

Deletions

with

alphanumeric

1—9

formatting, 1-16
input, cos—310 (FILEX),

stores

2—18

Destination,
area defined,

Data,

move

Deletion of

replace,

format,

Default,
Default,

DELETE

B-l

COS—310

(definition),
value,

6-1

value, terminating
characters, 1—5
Decimal code, equivalent, 1—12
Default conditions, line number,

Delete,

xiv
to, B—4

files,

Data

1—36

Decimal

1-3, 1-31
Data division, l—l, D-19

Data

TRACE/NO

1—4

(RECORD),

Data

1—3

statements

Debugging technique, DIBOL,
Debugging tools, 1—36

verify,

conversion,

Data

(DIBOL)

statements,

TRACE,

Data,
clear
clear

6-3

CHAIN,

Debugging
Debugging

operating procedure, 15-1
output,

6-1

operating procedures, 6—1
Debug binary programs, 6—1
Debug statements with CCP, 5—5
Debugging aids use numbers, l—l

15-7

error

messages,
1-8

Technique),

1-13
defined
numeric
stores

line

1-9
cleared

Data

cleared
source

numbers,

2-14

spaces,

Division,
to

zeros,

data,

1-9

1—9
1—13

Determining logical unit size,
Dev (definition), xv

4-7

INDEX

Development, aid
Device,
COPY! 8—3
create system

7-1

program,

(Cont.)

Directory, system device, B-4
Disk, formatting an RKOS (DKFMT),
14—1

new,

3—1

designation,
order of logical units on, 4-8
2-3
store binary program on,
xv

system format, B—2
(defined), 1—4
Dfield, stores decimal values,
DFU
(Data File Utility), xiii,

formatting

1-4
4-1

functions

4-8

operating procedures, 4—1
compiler (COMP), 5—1
DIBOL debugging technique
(DDT),
(DIGITAL's Business Oriented
Language), xiii

source

program, l—l
words of
required, 5—7

DIBOL

files,

address

2-21

14-2

for,

contents
contents

scratch

D-9

DIBOL,

reason

access,

READ

erase

WRITE

2—4,

1—39

2-8

command,

memory,

area,

(clear)

2-8

2—4

Directory space, consolidate,

in editing
2—12

text

screen

from,

2—15

2—20
or

printer,

2—17

8—5

Directory entry dates, valid,
Monitor

output

l-30

statement,

command,

stored

lines edited in,
list from, 2-17

D—9

techniques,

returned

2—12

l-lO

for, D—9
statement,

access,

transferred

10-1

Edit buffer,

array,

files

format,

in,

access,

DIRECTORY,

(DAFT),

(format RXOZ diskette),

EBCDIC

1—3

Oriented
(DIBOL), xiii

Language

DIRECTORY

1-37

Business

access,

key, D-l
Technique

Fix

Duplicate line numbers,

1—3

manipulation,
debugging, 1-3
Input/Output, 1—3

access

arrow

DYFMT

data

field

1—8,

15—1

terminating

control, 1—3
data definition,

KEY

1—3,

statement,

l—3

compiler,

Direct
Direct

fields for
l-l8

numeric

DISPLAY,

Dump and

1—4

Dimensions

D-l

Down

statements,

DIGITAL's

interaction with ACCEPT,

DISPLAY,

1—1, 1-13
l-l, D-l9
Procedure, l-l, D—20
results of, l—12
DKMFT (format RK05 disk), 14—1
Dollar, rounding to the, l—12

code

statement,

value,

Input/Output statement,

1—18

(/),

source

statement,

hardware,

feature,

Data,

D—19

use

1-4

with,

Division

language, l—l
programs in CHAIN, 1-7
slowed by TRAP, 1—38
table of symbols, 7—1
of

used

D-2
DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1-3

in,

statements

programming

10—1

format,

special effects,

D—9

access,

clear

14—2

10-1

DISPLAY,

6—1
DIBOL

format,

(DYFMT),

sectors

universal

Display

RXOZ

universal,
in

DIBOL

kinds

3741

IBM

10—1

4-10

DIBOL,
direct

with

compatible

DFU,
messages,
logical unit assignments,

RKOS, 4-9
Diskette,
data mode, 10—6

Dfield

error

logical unit assignments

Disks,

8m5

into files, 2-19
files loaded into, 2-16

separated
source

Editing,
features

functions

the

refer

Monitor,
to

2—1

line numbers,

l-l

Index-5

INDEX

scratch area, 2-12
Editor commands,
ERASE, 2-14, 2—15
FETCH, 2—14, 2-16
LIST, 2-14, 2—17
Line Number, 2—14, 2—18
Number Commands, 2—14, 2-20
RESEQUENCE, 2-14, 2—21
WRITE, 2—14, 2—22
Editor, COS—310 line numbers, 2—14
Effective use of TRAP, 1—37
Eight-bit EBCDIC, 10—4
End of subroutine, RETURN, 1—33
END, same effect as STOP, 1—35
Erase edit buffer, load source

file,

2-16

Eliminate

free

space,

1—28,

End—of-file,

ERASE

command,

Erase

program,
text from

Erase

Error,
Error

1—3,
1—12

2-15
DELETE, 2—7

edit buffer,

2—15

points to, 5—8
checking, minimal by CREF,
caret

7—1
correction

11—3
line

during
numbering, 2-19
Error, line with underscored,
messages,

Error

messages,
BOOT, 12-1
COMP, 5—8
CREF, 7—2

DAFT,

5-2

D-15

F
Fatal

2-24

error,

DIBOL

command,

program

2-14,

under

2-16

Field descriptor statement, SORT,
9-1
Field, numeric verification, D—16
Field, part accessed by
subscripting, 1—13
Field statement information, 1—31
Fields, clear, 1—9
Fields, clearing, 1—13
D—15

3-4
space required, 3-2
exchange program (FILEX), 10—1
extending a, D—15
index technique, use of, D-l2

batch
batch

(SYSGEN),

START

START,

extension, OS/8
compatibility, 10—4

15—7

output,

COS—310

data

COS-310

source

(FILEX),

10-8

DFU, 4~10
FILEX, 10-13

output,

FLOW, 17-7
LINCHG, 13—2
MENU, 18—4
Monitor, 2-23

replace

PATCH, 11-5
PIP, 8-9
PRINT, 16-8

source

2—13
D-16
loaded into edit
an

rewriting
source

old,

buffer,

2—16

2—24

Error terminates BATCH, 2-5
Errors, fatal, 2—24
Errors, trappable (nonfatal),

Escape code sequences
terminators, D-8

(FILEX),

10—8

SORT, 9—7
SYSGEN, 3-5

2—24

Escape sequences, VTSO/VTSZ, D-22

6-Index

1—24

comparisons,
file,

name

DDT,‘6—3

Run-Time,

appending,

C—l

Appendix

relational

Extending

File,

(PATCH,)

automatic

Error

1—20

2-14,

Error

6-1

SORT,

Exit, FILEX, 10-12
Expressions,
arithmetic, 1-11
calculate arithmetic, 1—9
data manipulation, 1—10
(definitions), xvi, 1—10
parentheses in, 1—12

FETCH

2—25

1—40,

statement,

Examination of variables with

Fatal error,
DDT, 6—3

8-5

compiler
Equivalent decimal code,

END

(Cont.)

stored

specified

device, 2-22
START batch, to execute, 3—2
status information destroyed
(CHAIN), 1-8
structure, xiv
transfer a binary, 8—2, 8—3
transfer a data, 8-2, 8-3
transfer a source, 8—2, 8-3
transfer a system, 8—2, 8—3

truncating, D-l5
garbled, 2-3

File name,

INDEX

File

name

extensions,

(Cont.)

diskettes

Format,

binary, xiv,

IBM

B-2

consolidate, 8-1
COS—310, B-l
data, xiv, B—4
source, xiv, B-l
system, xiv, B-2
Files,
DIBOL

number

Format

for

Format
Format

printer output, 1-22
system device, B—2

1—12

files

source,

program,
as

2—12

file,

one

2-12

skipped

(erased), 8—5
D-ll
buffer separated

tranSferred in, 10-1
14-1
Formatting data, 1-16
RKOS disks (DKFMT), 14—1
RXOZ diskettes (DYFMT), 14—2
numeric fields to alphanumeric
fields, 1-16
special characters, 1—17

hardware, printers without,

Forms

sorted,
edit
2-19

into

3-4

two,

FORMS

program, 1-3
transferred in ASCII format,

source

rounding,

programs,

multiples passed

compatible with

10—1

3741,

Formats,

programming

D-l9
maximum

1-9

data,

Format

10- 4

Files,

statement,

1—22

1—3,

per

10-1

transferred
10-1
transferred
10-1

unsorted,
FILEX (File

in
in

EBCDIC
IMAGE

format,
format,

Exchange program),

(PRINT),

options,
1 0-5

Copy,
Delete, 1 0-4, 10—11
List, 10— 4, 1 0-11
exit, 10— 4, 1 0-12
Z, Zero (cle ar). 10—4,
FILEX Output Modes, 10-7

Filnam,
FINI

Fix

address, B—5
Handlers,
change in system, 3-3
Handler

Hardware
D—2

statement ll— 3,

3741

IBM

1-37

(DAFT),

IF,

1—21 ,

9-1

(Flowchart Generator),
file ,

commands,

17 -l

17-1

messages, 17-7
example of, 17-7
Flowchart Generator program

l7 -1

format,

2—1

feature,

diskettes
10-1

Control statement,
to make best use of

1—36
IMAGE format,

files

1—3, 1—24
TRACE,

transferred,

10—1
Incorrect

data,

clear,

D-4

rounding, 1—12
(increment) statement,

INCR

1—25

error

(FLOW),

clear

Increment,

l7 -2

compiling procedures,

Monitor,

compatible with,

technique, Dump and,

Fixed-length records,

display

Hardware, printers without forms
(SYSGEN), 3-4
Hierarchy, COS-310 storage, 4-7

xvi

command

1-3,

10-12

15-1
FLOW

statement,

contained

operating procedures, 10—4
Option C flowchart, 10— 10
10- 4,

Control

—

2-3

subroutines,

1—23

file , 10 -4
creation of source file
16—2
error messag es,
10—13
Input Mode, 10-5

C,
D,
L,
X,

D— 10

10—1
command

FILEX

Garbled file name,
Generalized ACCEPT
D-2

Index,

error

messages,

C-l

file

Index
INIT

1—3,

technique, D—12
Input/Output statement,

1-3, 1-26, 1-37
Index-7

INDEX

interaction of CHAIN and,

INIT,

D-l7

logical unit

INIT,

Initial

values
l-l, 1—32

Initialization,
Input,

for

1-27

in,

No.

statements,

OS/8

ASCII

Language,
DIBOL, xviii,

(FILEX),

Last

2-18

line,

10—5

diskette

(FILEX), 10—6
Input/Output statements (DIBOL),
ACCEPT, 1—4

Left

Limitations,
input line,
source

D—l

Interaction of CHAIN

and

characters

1—3

per,

subroutine,

Line

Number
2—18
Line Number

(LN)

command,

Editor,

2—13

Editor

2—18

1-6

automatically output,

2—18

5-8
6-1

Line

numbers,

changes with, 2—14
deletions with, 2—14
insertions with,

Justification of numeric

fields,

D—6

conversions, l—ll
Justify source data, 1—9

2—14

Lines—per-page configuration,
change,

13-1
for

List programs

Justified

LIST

command,

review,
2-14, 2-17,

2—8
10—11

Listing, source program
compilation, 5—2

Literals

KEY

field

Key,

last

direct
typed, l—S
for

access,

alphanumeric, l—lO
manipulation,

D—10

data

(defined), 1—10,
numeric, l—lO

Keyboard commands, Monitor, 2—2
Keyboard input, stores in afield,
1—4

RECORD,

l—lO
5-6

1-10

(Line Number) command,
2-14, 2—18
Logical units, xvi

Keyword, DAFT,

15—2

KREF, FLOW, 17—2
KRFSRT, FLOW, 17—2

Logical unit assignments,

4-1
the edit buffer, 4—2
stored file, 4—2
a
from the keyboard, 4—3
displayed on screen, 4-3
listed on printer, 4.4
from
from

(definition),
Labels,
Label

maximum

allowed
5—4

system,

8—Index

13—1

2—14,

commands, 2-18
exceeds 4095, 2—21
Line number default conditions,

Line Number
Line number

right,

ll—l

l~3

13—2

messages,

Line numbers

DDT,

2—20

program,

operating procedures, 13-1
Line Change program (LINCHG),

INIT,

D—l7

symbol table,

1-5
D—l

(Line Change program),

LINCHG

error

XMIT, 1-40
I/O handlers, 2-1
1/0 statements, 1-3
Input/Output division (SORT), 9—2
Insertions with line numbers, 2-14
Interaction of ACCEPT and DISPLAY,

Iteration,

1-1

LINCHG,

1-39

Internal

key typed,
arrow key,

Line,

DISPLAY, 1—18
INIT, 1—26
READ, 1—30

WRITE,

allowed in 24K byte
system, 5—4
referenced in statements, l—l
separated from statements, l—l
table of, used in DIBOL program,
7—1

characters

universal

maximum

14-1

COS-310 data (FILEX), 10-6
line limitations, 2—20

maximum

(Cont.)

xvi,

l-l

16K

byte

RKOS

disks,

4-9,

4-10

INDEX

Logical unit,
assigned by DFU, 4-8
calculating segments for,
defined, xvi
pushdown, 4—8
size,
table,

4—7

maximum open,
on

Lowercase

4—2

1-29

nonsystem device, 4-8
system device, 4—8
characters, xiv
a
a

M
Machine language instructions,
11-1
Mapping bad sectors, 10—1
Master control program, 2—1
Master

file,

records

in,

of edit
2—12

contents
returned to,

Memory,

messages,

program,

to,

2-14

buffer

to,
Monitor
Monitor
Monitor

5—2

via

ERROR

response
2-1

bootstrap, 2—4
prevents return

1—28
error

messages,

2—23
2—4

operating procedures,

Monitor,
MOUNT
Move

return

18-1

8-9

8-2,

to,
2—3

messages,
data between

fields,

Moving,
alphanumeric data,
numeric

data,

records,

1—9

1—14

1-14

1—15

Multiple
entry points, D—18
Multiple definition of fields,
CHAIN

9-1,

1—31

9—4

designations,

Multiple
screen,

16,

Monitor,

1—18

Multivolume

1—26

files,

1-26

files

Name

one

file,

(*),

1-11,

universal

1—13

interchange

lO—l

(defined),

data

manipulation,

1—9
2-4

and

(SYSGEN),

2—23
keyboard commands, 2-21
organization, 3-3
Monitor commands,
messages,

BATCH,2—4,
DATE, 2-4,
DIRECTORY,

passed

2—1

commands,

files

2-12

Multiplication

disassociate, 1—21
input (FILEX), 10—4
output (FILEX), 10—9

error

3-3

organization, B—3
Monitor, to patch, ll-l

18-1

Messages, MOUNT, 2-3
Messages, show on the
Mode,
associates, 1-26

copy

(SYSGEN),
commands

2—2
2—
loaded

Monitor,

program file, 18—1
Merge pass, combine volumes,

Modulo

2—5

Monitor, editing features of,
MONITOR/EDITOR Programs, xiii
Monitor Keyboard commands,
CTRL/C, 2-2
CTRL/O, 2-2
CTRL/Q, 2—2
CTRL/S, 2-2
CTRL/U, 2—2
CTRL/Z: 2-2

Monitor

18—4

operating procedures,

dot,

D-l4

data

Memory saved by COMP/O,
MENU,
command file, 18—1

Monitor

sequential

DELETE,
RETURN,

with WRITE, 1-39
Memory,
Memory, record‘moved to, 1—30
Memory requirements because of DDT
option (/D), 6—1
move

error

RUN, 2-4, 2—11
SAVE, 2—4, 2—13
Monitor commands,
execution of,

Monitor, copy

maximum entries,
unit size, 4-7

2—10

2—4,

PLEASE,

Logical
Logical units,
order
order

(Cont.)

2-5
2—6

2-4,

2—8

3—3

Negative numbers,
representing,
Nested,

CCP

characters
A—l

sections

any depth,

5-6

Nested,
Nested

subroutine
depth Of

index

file,

TRACE

statement,

CALLS, 1—6
50, 1'6

rough table, D-12
1-3, l—34
Nonsystem device, order of logical

units, 4-8
Index-9

INDEX

(Cont.)

Notation conventions,

braces,

LINCHG, 13—1
MENU, 18—1

brackets,.xiv
manual,

xiv

RETURN,

Merge, 9-4
Monitor, 2-4
PATCH, ll—l
PIP, 8-1
PRINT, 16-2
SORT, 9-1

symbols, xiv
Number

2-20

2-14,

commands,

Number,
to,

editing functions

refer

1‘1

SYSGEN,

Numbered
1—1

line begins statement,

Numbers,

debugging aids

refer

to,

error

refer

to,

messages

binary and unary, 1—12
binary, priority of execution,

Numbers, negative, A-l
Numeric,
data, moving, 1-14
data verification, l—ll

l—ll
of

Order

1—36

execution,

program

Orderly execution of commands
18-1

(MENU),
to

zeros,

l-13

Organization of

the

Monitor,

B-3

OS/8,

formatting to
alphanumeric, 1-16
fields, special effect

fields,

DISPLAY, 1-18
field verification,

ASCII

converted

alphanumeric,
variable,
'variable,

add

file

to,

name

D—6

extensions for
10—4
RKOS disk, 10-1

files

Output,

‘

COS-310
10-8
1—25

1—7

10-5
10-7

compatibility,

l—ll

one

CHAIN,

(FILEX),

Output (FILEX),
compatibility, 10—4

D—l6

Input

ASCII

fields, right justification,
literals, 1—10
values

1-13

Operator interaction, BATCH may
require, 2—5
Operators,
binary arithmetic, l—ll

1—1

(definition), xvi
destinations cleared

Operations, basic arithmetic,

1-1

Numbers,

3—1

DAFT,

source

file

(FILEX),

15-5

Modes

(FILEX), 10-7
(FILEX), 10-7
Universal diskette (FILEX),
Overlay record, 1-31

OS/8

0
Octal (definition), xv
Old file, replace, 2-13, 2-22
Control statement,
ON ERROR
1—3, 1—28
ON ERROR, preceding a data
conversion statement, 1—11

ASCII

ERROR presents
Monitor, 1—28

return

Operating procedures,
12-1
5-1
7—1
DAFT 15-1
DDT, 6-1
DFU, 4-1
DKFMT, 14-1
DYFMT, 14-2
FILEX, 10-4

BOOT,
COMP,
CREF,

(information
insertion), 1—32

(RECORD)

Parentheses

arithmetic
1—12

PATCH,

cmndfl,

11-1

error

correction,

error

messages,

11-3
11—5

operating procedures,
program, ll—l
restart, 11-3
Perform a Read/Check,
PIP

ll-l

8-2,

(Peripheral Interchange
Program),

accessed
error

lO-Index

expressions,

by RUN,

messages,

2-11

8-9

8—7

10—9

INDEX

(Cont.)

8-1

operating procedures,
options,

PIP

8—2,

size of

binary,

source

(DIBOL),

source

files

5—6
1-1
1—3

per,

compilation listing, 5—2
source limitations,
1—3
system executed by RUN, 2-11

source

table
7—1

labels

tracing,

in DIBOL,

used

1-36

Programs,
ACCEPT

command,

(Report program generator),

2-4,

certain

compiling procedure,
messages,

edit

buffer

4—1

output

1—38
2-8
slower than processor, 1-37
without forms hardware, 3-2

hardware

operators, 1—11
PROC, comment with, 1—29
PROC statement, 1-3, 1—29
Procedure, conditional compilation
(CCP), 5—5
Procedure Division, l-l, D—20

Program,

4—8
Pushdown

stack,

1-6

READ

1-23
1—7

1-7

DIBOL

CHAIN,

DIBOL

slowed by TRAP, 1—38
with DELETE, 2—7

execution terminated with
1—35
last statement in, 1—20

1—30
restrictions

l—3,
READ,

readability,
renumber

lines within,

Read/Check, perform

Readability

1-39
8—7
2—19

use,

8-2,

program,

Record,
file
D-l4

(defined),

Division

Descriptor

10—1

(SORT),

9—2

memory, 1—30
in data manipulation, 1—9
names
names, subscripted, 1-40
names subscripted
in an array,
1-13
to

1-31
size dependent on

logical units,

4—7
RECORD

—

Data

statement,
STOP,

in,
2-21

literals,
arrange

2—12

definition

1-3,

l-31,

5—6

1—10

Records,
clear,

2-1

files

xvi

logical units,

overlaying,

examination, DDT, 6-3
execution, Monitor, 2-1
execution, order of, 1—36

of
2-19

advanced,

Input/Output statement,

—

moved

number

files,

source

order

CHAIN, example of, 1—7
control, branches with GO TO,

control,

DIBOL

Pushdown,

count,

maximum

1—34

Programming techniques,

COS-310

master

2—8

D—l9

binary copied and stored, 2—13
binary executed by RUN, 2—11

erase

6—1

2—5

execution, binary

development aid, 7-1
DIBOL binary sequence,

D—l

DDT.

(SYSGEN),

3-4

Priority

review,

D—l
Pronam (definition),

on-line,

forms

for

Programming,

limitations because of TRAP,

without

in,

BATCH,
of stored, 2—8

segment sections,
type of, 2-7

16-8

logical unit table,
Printer,
contents of
to, 2—17

list

16—1

DISPLAY

terminate

directory

16-1
error

and

binary debugged with

2—10

PLEASE

COS—310
1—9

data,

9—1

clearing, 1—13
file, D—l4
moving, 1—15
master

subscripted,

use

with care,

1—40

Index-11

INDEX

Red characters, xiv
Relational comparisons
expressions, 1—24

Renumbering

program

between

lines,

2—14,

2-21

Repetition
Replace an
Replace an

1—32

character,
old file, 2-13
old source file,
count

2—22

Report programs, creation of, 16-1
Report program generator (PRINT),
16-1

Restrictions

after LN,
RETURN at end of

1-33

subroutine,

xv, 2—2, 2-19
Control statement,

key,
-

branches

Monitor,

1-3,

8-2,

TRAP,

numeric

fields, D—6
RK05 disk, format (DKFMT),
RK05 disk, logical unit

assignments
Rough table,
of

Rounding

on,

1—6
8—9
1-33

to,

PIP,

CALL

Rewriting a file, D-l6
Right arrow key, D-l
Right justification of

Run—Time

2—4,

14-1

program,
accessed by

command

diskette,

SORTIN,

9-3

Source

(defined)

file, D—12
(#), 1—12
1-7
,

4—2

(assign
variable), 1—32

SAVE

command

program,
Scratch area

value

binary

2—13,

5—4

(binary)

modification,

2—12,

8-6

Screen,
of edit buffer
to, 2—17
line number, 1-18

contents

move

cursor

on,

output

1-18

when

full, 2—18
Search for records,
Sectors

10-1,

12-Index

universal
12-1

data
1—9

in destination,

area

stored

area

converted
1—9

and

files, xiv, D-19
COS-310, B-l
COS—310 output (FILEX), lO~8
DIBOL programming of, D-l9
creation of, 16—2
load into edit buffer, 2—16,

Source

2—16
1—3

program,

replace old, 2—22
stored on device,

2—22

separate edit buffer

into

two,

2—19

store

2—4,

9-1

justified,

2—11

(RECORD)

9—7

messages,

1—9

messages, 2-24
format (DYFMT),

error

RUN, 2-11
file, 9—1, 9—5

key, 9-3
operating procedures,
Sorted file, D—ll

Source

4-10

in,

1—22

9—1

xiv,

SORT

per

l—ll

manipulation,

index

numbers

declared

Monitor,
RX02

fields,
Size,

Source

command,

CHAIN

Seven-bit ASCII, 10-4
Signs embedded in alphanumeric

error

control

RETURN without

RUN

Monitor

Skip—code (definition),
Skip (erase) files, 8—5

2—19

1—33
Return

2—5

commands,

defined

and WRITE,

READ

Return

RETURN,

Sequential execution

program, 5—6
in RECORD statement, 1—1
determining logical unit, 4-7
Six-bit binary word, A-l

2-21

1-39

RETURN

Segment programs, 1—34
Segments, calculating for logical
unit, 4-7
Semicolon, comments after, 1-1

binary

RESEQUENCE command, 2—14,
Restart
(PATCH), 11-4

RETURN

(C0nt.)

15-1

diskette,

transfer,
Source

8—2,

8—8

program,

compilation listing, 5—2
compiler converts to binary,
debug with CCP, 5-5
DIBOL,
erase

l-l
with

DELETE,

limitations,
maximum

5-1

2-7

1—3

characters

in,

1—3

Space,
allocate
8-6

consolidate

binary

scratch

directory, 8—2,

area,

8-5

INDEX

Special characters, xv, 1-17
Special characters in formatting,

START

DISPLAY, l-18
DISPLAY codes, 1-18
Compiler statement, l—3,
in

codes
.

—

l-34

system

START

with

12-1

device,

new

1—34

comment,

program

Store

system date,

5-1,
on

5—3

device,

2—6

Subroutine, ACCEPT, D—2
Subroutine, branches control

statements,

1—6

traceback, 6-1
internal, 1—6
nested in, 1—6
TRAP, 1—37
Subroutines, generalized ACCEPT,
call

batch

file,

2—4,

batch
batch

file
file

space

3—2

(SYSGEN),

define
define

in,

3-4

l—34

comment,

comments

3—3

required,

Statement,
CHAIN encountered,

D—l
1—7

l—l

size

l—l
1—1
1-20
last in program is END,
lines with comments, l—l
separated from label, 1-l

of,
type of,

Statements,

Division,

manipulation,

initial

l—9

kinds

1—40

Subscripting
fields,
Subtraction

parts of

access

1—13

(—), 1—11, 1-13
internal, 5-8

DAFT command, 15—2
maximum in system, 1—3
notation convention, xiv

for, 1—1
labels, 1'1
in DIBOL: 1-3

values

reference

Subscripted array in data
manipulation, 1-9
Subscripted record names, l-l3,

Symbol table,
Symbols,

l-l

Data

data

(System Generation
PROGRAM), XIII, 3-1
SYSGEN default, 3—2, 13-1

SYSGEN

Statements, DIBOL
ACCEPT, l—3
CALL, 1-6
CHAIN, 1-6

3—1

SYSGEN/B,
SYSGEN/C,

3-3

END: 1‘20
FINI, 1-21
FORMS' 1‘22

boot

$3,T2:2}1'23

cos—:10 logical] units an,
crea

Control
1'35
EFFECT

device,

new

3—3

1'36

statement,

new

ev1ce,

4-7

—

change, 2-6
date stored by DATE, 2-7
device directory, B-4
device holds BATCH cmndfl, 2—5
device, order of logical units,
4-8
l—4
encounters ACCEPT,
device format, B—2

1—3,

STOP,
terminates

date

TRAP, 1-37
WRITE, 1-39
XMIT, 1-40

SAME

start

change handlers in,

ERROR' 1'28
PROC, 1-29
READ, 1-30
RECORD, 1-31
START, 1-34
STOP, l-3, 1—35
TRACE/NO TRACE:

—

12-1

STOP

to,

Subroutine,
CALL

START,

SlX

listing,

binary

Store

l—6

START

With

Storage map,
2-13

1—17

Special
Special

(Cont.)

1-35

END,

program

execution,

1-35
.

Storage hierarchy,

4—7

files,
files,
files,

xiv, B—2

COS—310, B-2
transfer, 8-2, 8-8
generation program (SYSGEN),
I/O handlers in Monitor, 2—1
maximum

program,
program,
programs

symbols per,
erase with,
transfer,
accessed

programs executed

3-1

1-3

2—7
8-8

by RUN,
by RUN,

2—11

Index-l3

INDEX

(Cont.)

limitations

TAB

Tab

key produces 8 spaces,
settings, 1—1

on printers,
1—38
normally precedes FORMS or XMIT,

2—19

used in DIBOL
7—1
Table, logical unit assignments,
4—2, 4—6
Table lookup, direct access, D—lO,
D—ll

1—37
slows DIBOL programs, 1—38
subroutine construct, 1—37
turned off in CHAIN, 1—8

labels

Table,

program,

Tabs

for readability, 2-19
alarm is sounded
(PLEASE), 2-10
Terminal BATCH, certain programs,
2—5
Terminate program execution with
STOP, 1—35
Terminating character, 1-4, 1-5
Terminating value, used by DIBOL,
used

Trappable error, 2—24
Truncating a file, D~15
Two-line PLEASE command, 2—10
Type, define in RECORD statement,

1-1

Terminal

1—4

Terminators,

escape

sequences,

Text,

(clear)

edit

erase

U
in COS—310, 1—12
Unconditional GO TO, 1-23
Underscores line number with
errors, 5-2

Unary operators

Universal

diskette,
(definition), lO—l
format for, lO-l

D—8

buffer,

functions

2—15

Text, lines of assigned
number, 2—14

line

Debugging

—

1—36
turned
use of

off
IF

Trace/No

in
to

Trace

Traceback,

1-3

statement,

placement of,

8—3
1—36
statements, 1—36

CHAIN,

isolate,

(DDT),

6—1

Transfer,
8—2, 8-3
(XMIT), 1-40
files, 8—4
data records, 1—40
files, ASCII format, 10-1
files, SYSGEN, 3-3
files, universal format, 10—1
source
files, 8—2, 8—8
system files, 8—8

binary file,
data
data

Transferring control through

l—24

Transferring variable values,
TRAP

Control

statement,

D—7

1—3,

1—37

TRAP,
information for

of,

l4—Index

1—37

(FILEX), 10-9
file, D-lO
Up arrow key, D—l
Uppercase characters, xiv
Unsorted

subroutine call

statement,

10-1

output

TRACE,
indiscriminate

sectors,

10-2

Datasystem, xiii
Datasystem, xiii
Top-of—page command, 1—34
308,
310,

TRACE

input (FILEX), 10-4, 10—6
interchange format directory,

effective

use

Valid

directory entry dates,

2—8

Value,
default
initial

(SYSGEN), 3-2
(definition), 1—32
terminating used by DIBOL, 1—4
Values,
CCP different than DIBOL, 5—6
transferring variable, D-l7
Variable,
add one to numeric, l—25
examination in DDT, 6—1
1-9
name,
numeric in CHAIN, 1-7

values, transferring, D—l7
Variables (defined), 1—9, 5—6
Verfication, numeric field, D—16
Verify data, copy and, 8-2, 8-7
Verify numeric data, l—ll
VT50/VT52 Escape Sequences, D—22
VT52 clearing feature, D-3

INDEX

Word

boundry,

Word

count

Words

WRITE

(Cont.)

5-6

B—l
code requirement, 5-7
editor command, 2-14, 2-22

number,

Input/Output statement,

1—3,

1—39

1-37,

WRITE,
move

data

with,

restrictions

1—39
use,

1—39

X
XMIT

Input/Output statement,

1—3,
XMIT

1—40

1—37,

statement,

with,

extending

file

D-15

2
Zero,

divison

by,

1-28,

2-26

lS-Index

COS-310

System Reference Manual
AA-D647A-TA

READER'S COMMENTS

DIGITAL will
only.
this form at the company's
Problems with software should be reported
discretion.
If you
on a Software Performance Report
(SPR) form.
receive
to
and
are
a
written
eligible
reply
require
submit your comments on an SPR
one under SPR service,

This

NOTE:

use

form

comments

for

document

submitted

comments

form.

find

Did you

errors

this manual?

so,

Did you find this manual understandable,
Please make suggestions for improvement.

specify by

and

usable,

page.

well-organized?

along
cut

Please

sufficient documentation on associated system programs
If not,
for use of the software described in this manual?
what material is missing and where should it be placed?
Is

there

required

Please

indicate the

type of user/reader that you

Assembly language

Name

DECIDED

programmer

Occasional programmer

(experienced)

little

nearly represent.

programmer

Higher-level language
User with

most

programming experience

Student programmer

Non-programmer interested in computer concepts and capabilities
Date

Organization
Street

City

State

Zip Code
or

Country

Fold Here

Do Not Tear

Fold Here and Staple

FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 33

MAYNARD. MASS.
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

Postage will be paid by:

Eflflfllfill
Business

Products

Software

Development Group

MKl-Z/H32
Continental Blvd.

Merrimack,

New

Hampshire

03054